Espace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone V200R003C30 Administrator Guide PDF

eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone
V200R003C30
Administrator Guide
Issue 17
Date 2019-11-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: https://e.huawei.com
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Administrator Guide Preface
Preface
Overview
This document covers the following information about the eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 IP
phone (eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 for short): service features, networking, batch
configurations with and without eSight, configuration methods of common functions, and
basic troubleshooting methods.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Technical support engineers
l Maintenance engineers
l Agent engineers
l Enterprise administrators
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Symbol Description
Calls attention to important information, best practices

and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and environment
deterioration.
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.
Issue 17 (2019-11-15)
This issue is the sixteenth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
V200R002C30SPCm10, and includes the following changes:
USM is renamed CloudUSM for the EC6.X networking.
Updated the content about Table2 Parameter description.
Issue 16 (2019-06-20)
This issue is the fifteenth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
Updated the content about 6.4.1 Network and 6.4.12 Others.
Issue 15 (2019-04-03)
This issue is the fourteenth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
Updated the content about 6.4.6 SIP Signaling, 5.9.3 UC Directory, and 5.6 Multi-
Certificate Support.
Issue 14 (2018-12-22)
This issue is the thirteenth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
V200R003C30SPCk00, and includes the following changes:
Updated the content about 5.14 Redundancy and 6.3.1 Date and Time.
Issue 13 (2018-11-07)
This issue is the twelfth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPCj00,
and includes the following changes:
Updated the content about 6.4.1 Network.
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Issue 12 (2018-10-15)
This issue is the eleventh official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
V200R003C30SPCh00, and includes the following changes:
Updated the content about 5.2 Multi-Line Support and 6.4.2 Account.
Issue 11 (2018-09-04)
This issue is the tenth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPCf00,
Updated the content about 5.6 Multi-Certificate Support.
Issue 10 (2018-07-13)
This issue is the ninth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPCf00,
Updated the content about 1 Before You Start, 4.2.7.1 Creating a TR-069 Script and 5.9.3
UC Directory.
Issue 09 (2018-04-28)
This issue is the eighth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPCc00,
Added the content about 5.9.4 Directory (VFOneNet) and 8.4 VFOneNet Provision
Configuration Guide.
Updated the content about 3.3.3 Configuring the VLAN, 5.14 Redundancy, 5.9.1 LDAP
Directory, 6.4.1 Network, 6.4.6 SIP Signaling, and 8.3.4 Setting Option 246 Parameters.
Issue 08 (2018-03-22)
This issue is the seventh official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPCa00,
Updated the content about 6.4.12 Others.
Issue 07 (2018-03-10)
This issue is the sixth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPC900,
Updated the content about 6.4.6 SIP Signaling.
Issue 06 (2018-01-31)
This issue is the fifth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPC800,
Updated the content about4.1.5 Managing Configuration Files, 5.2 Multi-Line Support,
6.4.8 Configuration File and 6.4.2 Account.
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

Issue 05 (2017-12-30)
This issue is the fourth official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPC700,
Added the content about 8.2 Editing the Local Contact File.
Updated the content about 4.1 Using eSight, 5.6 Multi-Certificate Support, 6.4.8
Configuration File, 5.9.1 LDAP Directory and 8.1 Preparing a UPF File.
Issue 04 (2017-11-30)
This issue is the third official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPC600,
Added the content about 7.5 Diagnose.
Updated the content about 5.9.1 LDAP Directory, 6.4.2 Account, 6.4.3 Server, 6.4.4 Admin
Password Change and 6.4.11 Ping Test.
Issue 03 (2017-06-30)
This issue is the second official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPC300,
Added the content about 8.3.2 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the Windows Server
2012.
Updated the content about 4.1.7.2 Deploying IP Phones Automatically, 5.3 Dialing Rules,
5.14 Redundancy, 6.4.1 Network and 6.4.12 Others.
Issue 02 (2017-04-17)
This issue is the first official release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPC200,
Added the content about 5.1 Distinctive Ring.
Updated the content about 4.1 Using eSight, 4.2 Using TMS, 5.8 Advanced Secretary
Service, 5.11 Extension Mobility, 5.14 Redundancy, 6.4.2 Account, 6.4.4 Admin
Password Change and 6.4.10 TR069.
Issue 01 (2016-12-28)
This issue is the FOA release for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 V200R003C30SPC100.
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

Administrator Guide Contents
Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................ ii
1 Before You Start............................................................................................................................. 1
2 Before Your Configuration.......................................................................................................... 3
2.1 EC6.X Networking......................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 UC2.X Networking.........................................................................................................................................................3
2.3 IMS+UC Networking..................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.4 IMS Networking............................................................................................................................................................. 5
2.5 Third-Party SIP Server Networking............................................................................................................................... 6
3 Preparing for Your Configuration..............................................................................................8

3.1 Obtaining Reference Documents....................................................................................................................................8
3.2 Required Data............................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.3 Network Environment Setup........................................................................................................................................ 14
3.3.1 Wi-Fi (Only for eSpace 7950 IP Phone)....................................................................................................................14
3.3.2 802.1x........................................................................................................................................................................ 16
3.3.3 Configuring the VLAN..............................................................................................................................................20
3.3.4 Configuring the Phone IP Address............................................................................................................................ 21
4 Selecting a Configuration Method...........................................................................................23

4.1 Using eSight................................................................................................................................................................. 23
4.1.1 Setting STUN Server Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 24
4.1.2 Setting Redirection Server Parameters...................................................................................................................... 26
4.1.3 Creating an IP Phone Group...................................................................................................................................... 28
4.1.4 Managing IP Phone Number Resources.................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.5 Managing Configuration Files...................................................................................................................................31
4.1.6 Managing Version Files............................................................................................................................................. 40
4.1.7 Deploying IP Phones in Batches............................................................................................................................... 42
4.1.7.1 Deploying IP Phones Manually.............................................................................................................................. 42
4.1.7.2 Deploying IP Phones Automatically...................................................................................................................... 46
4.1.8 Configuring the Connection Between an IP Phone and eSight................................................................................. 48
4.1.8.1 Setting Parameters for Connecting to eSight..........................................................................................................48
4.1.8.2 Configuring the Access Scan Function of eSight................................................................................................... 50
4.2 Using TMS................................................................................................................................................................... 51
4.2.1 Deployment Process.................................................................................................................................................. 52
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

4.2.2 Creating an IP Phone Management Domain............................................................................................................. 52

4.2.3 Uploading Basic IP Phone Information.....................................................................................................................54
4.2.4 Adding an IP Phone to a Management Domain........................................................................................................ 55
4.2.5 Upgrading IP Phones (Optional)............................................................................................................................... 57
4.2.6 Configuring IP Phones (Optional)............................................................................................................................. 59
4.2.6.1 Creating a TR-069 Script........................................................................................................................................59
4.2.6.2 Running a TR-069 Script........................................................................................................................................62
4.2.7 Allocating Numbers...................................................................................................................................................64
4.2.7.1 Creating a TR-069 Script........................................................................................................................................64
4.2.7.2 Running a TR-069 Script........................................................................................................................................66
4.3 Using DHCP Option 246.............................................................................................................................................. 66
4.3.1 Batch Configuration.................................................................................................................................................. 66
4.3.2 Number Provisioning.................................................................................................................................................71
4.4 Using Web.................................................................................................................................................................... 76
4.5 Using LCD....................................................................................................................................................................79
5 Service Configuration.................................................................................................................80
5.1 Distinctive Ring............................................................................................................................................................ 80
5.2 Multi-Line Support....................................................................................................................................................... 82
5.3 Dialing Rules................................................................................................................................................................ 99
5.4 Emergency Call.......................................................................................................................................................... 102
5.5 XML App................................................................................................................................................................... 105
5.6 Multi-Certificate Support............................................................................................................................................112
5.7 Service Rights Management....................................................................................................................................... 118
5.8 Advanced Secretary Service....................................................................................................................................... 119
5.9 Directory..................................................................................................................................................................... 123
5.9.1 LDAP Directory...................................................................................................................................................... 123
5.9.2 uPortal Directory..................................................................................................................................................... 130
5.9.3 UC Directory........................................................................................................................................................... 132
5.9.4 Directory (VFOneNet).............................................................................................................................................136
5.9.5 Importing and Exporting Contacts.......................................................................................................................... 138
5.10 Instant Conference, Group Conference, and Converged Conference.......................................................................139
5.11 Extension Mobility................................................................................................................................................... 141
5.12 Hunt Group............................................................................................................................................................... 145
5.13 Paging Group............................................................................................................................................................ 147
5.14 Redundancy.............................................................................................................................................................. 152
6 System Configuration...............................................................................................................167
6.1 Web Page Access........................................................................................................................................................ 167
6.2 Advanced Screen Access............................................................................................................................................168
6.3 System Settings...........................................................................................................................................................168
6.3.1 Date and Time..........................................................................................................................................................168
6.3.2 Language................................................................................................................................................................. 171
6.4 Advanced Settings...................................................................................................................................................... 172
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

6.4.1 Network................................................................................................................................................................... 172

6.4.2 Account....................................................................................................................................................................204
6.4.3 Server.......................................................................................................................................................................216
6.4.4 Admin Password Change.........................................................................................................................................237
6.4.5 Media....................................................................................................................................................................... 238
6.4.6 SIP Signaling........................................................................................................................................................... 246
6.4.7 Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................................................. 257
6.4.8 Configuration File....................................................................................................................................................260
6.4.9 Upgrade................................................................................................................................................................... 262
6.4.10 TR069.................................................................................................................................................................... 264
6.4.11 Ping Test................................................................................................................................................................ 272
6.4.12 Others.....................................................................................................................................................................274
6.5 Call Status...................................................................................................................................................................283
7 Maintenance............................................................................................................................... 285
7.1 Quick Configuration (for a Single Phone)..................................................................................................................285
7.2 Upgrade...................................................................................................................................................................... 290
7.2.1 Batch Upgrade (Using eSight).................................................................................................................................292
7.2.2 Batch Upgrade (Using TMS)...................................................................................................................................292
7.2.3 Batch Upgrade (Using Option 246).........................................................................................................................292
7.2.4 Automatic Upgrade..................................................................................................................................................292
7.2.5 Manual Upgrade...................................................................................................................................................... 294
7.3 Configuration File Delivery........................................................................................................................................294
7.3.1 Batch Delivery (Using eSight)................................................................................................................................ 295
7.3.2 Batch Delivery (Using TMS).................................................................................................................................. 295
7.3.3 Batch Delivery (Using Option 246).........................................................................................................................295
7.3.4 Local Import (for a Single Phone)........................................................................................................................... 295
7.4 Factory Reset.............................................................................................................................................................. 296
7.5 Diagnose..................................................................................................................................................................... 296
8 Appendix..................................................................................................................................... 298
8.1 Preparing a UPF File.................................................................................................................................................. 298
8.2 Editing the Local Contact File....................................................................................................................................306
8.3 Setting Up the DHCP Server...................................................................................................................................... 307
8.3.1 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the Windows Server 2008......................................................................... 307
8.3.2 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the Windows Server 2012......................................................................... 315
8.3.3 Setting Up the DHCP Server on Router AR-28...................................................................................................... 329
8.3.4 Setting Option 246 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 330
8.4 VFOneNet Provision Configuration Guide................................................................................................................ 333
8.5 Setting Up an HTTP Server........................................................................................................................................338
8.5.1 Using the Apache Server......................................................................................................................................... 338
8.5.2 Using the Windows IIS Component........................................................................................................................ 339
8.6 Setting Up the AD and DNS Servers..........................................................................................................................341
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

8.7 Editing the Microsoft AD2008 User.......................................................................................................................... 350
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Administrator Guide 1 Before You Start
1 Before You Start
This chapter provides guidance for you to use this manual in a more efficient way.
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 is a multimedia endpoint that complies with the Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP). It connects to a broadband network, instead of the traditional public switched
telephone network (PSTN).
Table 1-1 provides a scenario-based usage guide of this manual.
Table 1-1 Manual usage guide

Scenario Task Chapter/Section for
Reference
Deployment Setting up the network 3.3 Network Environment

environment Setup
Installing the IP phone and eSpace 7910/eSpace

using it to verify basic 7950/7093X Quick Start
telephony Guide
Learning about the 2 Before Your

networking, necessary data Configuration and 3
to prepare, and reference Preparing for Your
documents, and connecting Configuration
the IP phone to the network
Selecting a proper 4 Selecting a

configuration method for Configuration Method
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 5 Service Configuration
configuration, and and 6 System
configuring the eSpace Configuration
7910/eSpace 7950 system
and services depending on
your needs
Using all the phone eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950

functions IP Phone User Guide
Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

Administrator Guide 1 Before You Start
Scenario Task Chapter/Section for

Reference
Routine maintenance Upgrading eSpace 7910/ 7.2 Upgrade

eSpace 7950
Delivering the configuration 7.3 Configuration File

file Delivery
Quickly configuring a single 7.1 Quick Configuration

eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 (for a Single Phone)
Configuring services 5 Service Configuration
If you have any questions when using the eSpace 7900 series IP phone, go to Online Support
for consultation.

Administrator Guide 2 Before Your Configuration
2 Before Your Configuration
This section describes common networks of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, including its signaling
with different servers on the networks.
2.1 EC6.X Networking

This section describes the EC6.X networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, including its
signaling with different servers on the EC6.X network.
Figure 2-1 shows the EC6.X networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
Figure 2-1 EC6.X networking
2.2 UC2.X Networking

This section describes the UC2.X networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, including its
signaling with different servers on the UC2.X network.
Figure 2-2 shows the UC2.X networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.

Figure 2-2 UC2.X networking
2.3 IMS+UC Networking

This section describes the IMS+UC networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, including its
signaling with different servers on the IMS+UC network.
Figure 2-3 shows the IMS+UC networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.

Figure 2-3 IMS+UC networking
2.4 IMS Networking

This section describes the IMS networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, including its
signaling with different servers on the IMS network.
Figure 2-4 shows the IMS network of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.

Figure 2-4 IMS networking
2.5 Third-Party SIP Server Networking

This section describes the third-party SIP server networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950,
including its signaling with different servers on the third-party SIP server network.
Figure 2-5 shows the third-party SIP server networking of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.

Figure 2-5 Third-party SIP server networking

Administrator Guide 3 Preparing for Your Configuration
3 Preparing for Your Configuration
This section describes the preparations you must make for configuration of eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950.
You can manage eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 in a unified manner using eSight or DHCP server,
including version upgrade and configuration file delivery.
3.1 Obtaining Reference Documents

This section describes how to obtain reference documents for configuration of eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950.
Before deploying eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, obtain related documents for guidance. Visit
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise and search the keyword to view or obtain relevant
documents.
Table 3-1 Obtaining reference documents

Document Description Keyword
eSpace 7910 and 7950 Describes the appearance, buttons, basic eSpace
IP Phone User Guide services, IP telephony (IPT) services, and 7910/7950
Unified Communications (UC) services related
to eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
eSpace 7910 and 7950 Describes the basic configuration parameters

IP Phone Configuration related to eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
File Parameter
Description
eSpace 7910 and 7950 Describes the network management

IP Phone TR-069 configuration parameters related to eSpace
Configuration 7910/eSpace 7950.
Parameter Description
eSpace 7910 and 7950 Describes how to perform custom development

IP Phone XML of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 XML
Application Secondary applications.
Development Guide

Document Description Keyword
eSpace 7910 and 7950 Describes how to make a language package file
IP Phone Language for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
Package Customization
Guide
eSpace 7910, 7950 and Describes the parameters related to eSpace

7903X IP Phone 7910/eSpace 7950 communication matrix.
Communication Matrix
CloudEC Product Describes the structure, highlights, CloudEC

Documentation components, services, functions, operation and
maintenance, network, and applications related
to the Huawei CloudEC solution.
eSpace EC Product Describes the structure, highlights, eSpace EC

Documentation components, services, functions, operation and
maintenance, network, and applications related
to the Huawei eSpace EC solution.
eSight Product Describes various network element (NE) eSight

Documentation management functions related to eSight (a
Huawei-provided network management system
tailored for enterprises), including:
l NE access
l NE management
l Topology management
l Security management
l Performance management
l Log management
l Fault management
TMS Product Describes the architecture, characteristics, TMS9950

Documentation processes, security management, functions,
installation, operation, and maintenance of the
TMS.
IMS Product Describes the product introduction, installation, IMS

Documentation upgrade, configuration, operation and
maintenance, troubleshooting, and planning
related to the IMS.
eSpace U19XX Unified Describes the architecture, features, eSpace

Gateway Product components, services, functions, operation and U19XX/
Documentation and maintenance, network, and applications related U29XX
eSpace U29XX Unified to eSpace U19XX and eSpace U29XX series
Gateway Product unified gateways.
Documentation

3.2 Required Data

This section describes how to obtain data necessary for configuration of eSpace 7910/eSpace
7950s depending on your needs.
Obtain necessary data, as listed in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Required data

Item Description How to Obtain
Phone IP address Generally, eSpace 7910/eSpace On the phone login screen,

7950 automatically obtains an IP choose More > Network >
address from the DHCP server. Status > Network and view the
However, you can still choose to phone's IP address.
use a static IP address assigned by
your network administrator for
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
Phone MAC Obtain the physical address of

address eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950's
network adapter, which is globally
unique.
Hardware version Obtain the hardware version On the phone login screen,
number of the number of eSpace 7910/eSpace choose More > Network >
phone 7950. Status > About Phone and view
the hardware version number.
Phone SN Obtain the product serial number On the phone login screen,
(SN) of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950. choose More > Network >
Status > About Phone and view
the phone SN.
You can also view the product
SN and barcode at the back of
the phone body.
DHCP server Obtain the IP address of the DHCP If a DHCP server has been
address server. This IP address is required deployed, obtain the DHCP
when you are manually server address from your
configuring eSpace 7910/eSpace network administrator.
7950. If no DHCP server is available,
deploy a DHCP server by
referring to 8.3 Setting Up the
DHCP Server.

DNS server Obtain the IP address of the DNS If a DNS server has been
address server. This IP address is required deployed, obtain the DNS server
when you are manually address from your network
configuring eSpace 7910/eSpace administrator.
7950. If no DNS server is available,
deploy a DNS server by
referring to 8.6 Setting Up the
AD and DNS Servers.
File server Obtain the IP address of the file If a file server has been
address server that stores upgrade files deployed, obtain the file server
including the Upgrade Policy File address from your network
(UPF) and the version file. administrator.
If no file server is available,
deploy a file server by referring
to 8.5 Setting Up an HTTP
Server.

Registrar server Obtain the IP address of the SIP Obtain the SIP server address
address server with which eSpace 7910/ from your network administrator.
eSpace 7950 registers based on the
network environment.
l In an EC6.X network
environment, the SIP server is
the CloudUSM server. Enter
the domain name of the
CloudUSM server as the server
address.
l In a UC2.X network
a gateway of the eSpace U1900
series.
l In an IMS+UC network
a gateway of the eSpace U2900
series. Its IP address is
automatically pushed by the
Authentication and Admission
(AA) server.
l In an IMS network
environment, this parameter is
set by the administrator.
l In a CC network environment,
the SIP server is a gateway of
the eSpace U2900 series, a
UAP3300, or a Session Border
Controller (SBC).
l In a third-party SIP server
network environment, the SIP
server is a third-party SIP
server.
AA server Obtain the IP address of the AA Obtain the AA server address

address server, which is deployed only in from your network administrator.
an IMS+UC network environment.
uPortal server This parameter is available only in Obtain the uPortal server address
address an IMS network environment. from your network administrator.
Profile picture Obtain the IP address of the profile Obtain the profile picture server
server address picture server. If you are using the address from your network
IMS+UC network environment, administrator.
this IP address is automatically
pushed by the AA server.
In an EC6.X or IMS network
environment, the value is delivered
by the uPortal server.

Upgrade server Obtain the IP address of the Obtain the upgrade server
address upgrade server based on the address from your network
network environment. administrator.
Directory server Obtain the IP address of the Obtain the directory server
address directory server based on the address from your network
network environment. administrator.
l In an EC6.X network For details about how to
environment, use the RCS configure an LDAP server, see
address delivered by the 5.9.1 LDAP Directory.
uPortal server.
environment, use the IP
address of the UC directory
server or LDAP server.
l On the network where the
LDAP directory is used, use
the IP address of the LDAP
server.
l In an IMS network
environment, enter the address
of the LDAP server or use the
RCS address delivered by the
uPortal server.
Version file Obtain and apply it to eSpace Visit http://

7910/eSpace 7950 in unified or support.huawei.com/enterprise
single phone upgrade mode. and search for the keyword
eSpace 7910/7950 to download
the desired version.
Contact file Obtain and use it to edit and You can log in to http://
editing tool generate contact files. For details, support.huawei.com/
see 8.2 Editing the Local Contact enterpriseand search for the
File. keyword eSpace 7910/eSpace
7950 to download the tools.zip
file of the desired version.
Signal tone, and Obtain the files, compress them The signal tone file is a .wav file
certificate files into the .tar format, and import in PCM format.
the .tar file into eSpace 7910/ The certificate file is a .pem file.
eSpace 7950 in unified or single Obtain the certificate file from
phone upgrade mode. the corresponding server side.

Configuration file Modify the configuration file Visit http://

depending on your needs, and support.huawei.com/enterprise
apply the modified configuration and search the keyword eSpace
file to eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 7910/7950 to download the
by means of, for example, unified desired version.
configuration file management or
file import to a single phone. For
details, see 4 Selecting a
Configuration Method.
Factory When a phone restores factory Modify the obtained

customization settings, values set in the factory configuration file. For details,
configuration file configuration file customized see 6.4.8 Configuration File.
based on the site requirements are
used as the default values. You can
use the UPF upgrade method to
import the file to the phone for
configuration to take effect. For
details, see 4.3 Using DHCP
Option 246.
Language Obtain the file, compress it into Visit http://

package file a .tar format, and import the .tar support.huawei.com/enterprise
file into eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 and choose Software Download
in unified or single phone upgrade > Enterprise Communication >
mode. For details, see the eSpace Endpoints. Download the
7910 and 7950 IP Phone Tools.zip file of the desired
Language Package Customization version.
Guide.
Integrity Verify the downloaded software Visit http://

verification guide packages to ensure the software support.huawei.com/enterprise
validity. and choose Tools > Enterprises
Common > Software digital
signature validation tool (PGP
Verify) > V100R001C00.
Download the OpenPGP
Signature Verification Guide.
3.3 Network Environment Setup

This section describes how to connect eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 to a network.
3.3.1 Wi-Fi (Only for eSpace 7950 IP Phone)

eSpace 7950 supports the Wi-Fi function from V200R003C00SPCe00.

Accessing the Wi-Fi List Screen

l If you have logged in to the IP phone, choose Apps > System > Wi-Fi to access the Wi-
Fi list screen.
l If you have not logged in to the IP phone, choose More > Network > Wi-Fi to access
the Wi-Fi list screen.
If the Wi-Fi configuration item is not displayed on the LCD screen, contact the administrator.
Enabling and Connecting Wi-Fi

Step 1 Connect the Wi-Fi Dongle to the USB port.
Step 2 Access the Wi-Fi list screen.
Step 3 Press Enable.
Step 4 Connect Wi-Fi.

l If you select a wireless network requiring no password, press Connect.
l If you select a wireless network requiring a password, press Connect, enter the
password, and press Done.
You can set a static IP address or enable DHCP to automatically allocate an IP address in IP Setting
when connecting Wi-Fi.
is displayed next to the connected Wi-Fi.
----End
Adding a Network
Step 1 On the Wi-Fi list screen, press More.
Step 2 Press Add Network.
Step 3 Enter a network name in the Network SSID field. Select the security type and set parameters
such as the password as prompt.
Step 4 (Optional) Press IP Setting. According to the network planning, set a static IP address or
enable DHCP to automatically allocate an IP address.
Step 5 Press Done.
is displayed next to the connected Wi-Fi.
----End
Viewing Wi-Fi Details

Step 1 On the Wi-Fi list screen, select the connected Wi-Fi and press Detail.
In the details screen, you can check the network SSID, IP address, status, signal strength,
speed, and security.

Step 2 (Optional) Press IP Setting. According to the network planning, set a static IP address or
enable DHCP to automatically allocate an IP address.
----End
Clearing Networks
l Clear networks in the Wi-Fi list.
a. On the Wi-Fi list screen, press More.
b. Press Forget.
l Clear networks on the Wi-Fi details screen.
a. On the Wi-Fi list screen, select the connected Wi-Fi and press Detail.
b. Press Forget.
Disabling Wi-Fi
On the Wi-Fi list screen, press Disable.
3.3.2 802.1x
This topic describes two 802.1x authentication methods supported by IP phone:
Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) and Extensible
Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS).
802.1x is a port-based network access control protocol defined by IEEE. This protocol
implements access authentication and control for devices attempting to connect to an
enterprise's internal network. Devices (for example, IP phones) are granted access to internal
network resources only after being authenticated.
The IP phone currently supports two 802.1x authentication methods: EAP-MD5 and EAP-
TLS. If one method was originally configured, the IP phone will be forced to request the same
method.
l To ensure network access security, it is recommended that you enable the 802.1x function and use
the EAP-TLS process.
l If EAP-MD5 is used, obtain the 802.1x user name and password from the network administrator
beforehand.
l When IP phones connect to the network in 802.1x mode, if the root certificate is replaced on the
server, IP phones of the V200R003C30SPCd00 and earlier versions must be restarted to ensure
successful authentication.
l When a phone connects to the Huawei public cloud, the 802.1x authentication is not supported.
l To ensure that the 802.1x function takes effect, enable the 802.1x configuration on both the IP phone
and the switch.
EAP-MD5 Authentication Process

Figure 3-1 illustrates the EAP-MD5 authentication process.

Figure 3-1 EAP-MD5 authentication process
The authentication process is as follows:
1. The IP phone initiates an 802.1x authentication request to the switch.

2. The switch asks the IP phone to provide its user name.
3. The IP phone sends its user name to the switch.
4. The switch forwards the user name to the RADIUS server.
5. After identity authentication, the RADIUS server sends an EAP-MD5 authentication
request to the switch.
6. The switch forwards the EAP-MD5 authentication request to the IP phone.
7. The IP phone sends MD5 digest to the switch and then to the RADIUS server.
8. If authentication is successful, the switch opens all ports and the IP phone can then
access network resources.
9. If authentication fails, an authentication failure message is displayed on the IP phone,
and the IP phone cannot access network resources.
EAP-TLS Authentication Process

Before EAP-TLS authentication, make sure that the following prerequisites have been met:

l The switch supports MAC-address and certificate-based authentication.

l The IP phone supports EAP-TLS authentication.
Figure 3-2 illustrates the EAP-TLS authentication process.
Figure 3-2 EAP-TLS authentication process
The authentication process is as follows:
1. The IP phone initiates an 802.1x authentication request to the switch.

2. The switch asks the IP phone to provide its user name.
3. The IP phone sends its user name to the switch.
4. The switch forwards the user name to the RADIUS server.
5. After identity authentication, the RADIUS server sends an EAP-TLS authentication
request to the switch.
6. The switch forwards the EAP-TLS authentication request to the IP phone.
7. The IP phone and the RADIUS server implement TLS handshake negotiations.
8. If authentication is successful, the switch opens all ports and the IP phone can then
access network resources.

9. (Optional) If authentication fails, the IP phone obtains the eSight server IP address from
the DHCP server and then connects to the eSight server to download a new certificate.
10. (Optional) After the new certificate is downloaded, the IP phone automatically restarts
and initiates authentication again (starting from 1).
EAP-TLS Certificate Update Process

The EAP-TLS certificate is stored on the eSight server. The IP phone can connect to the
eSight server to download the EAP-TLS certificate. Figure 3-3 illustrates the EAP-TLS
certificate update process.
Figure 3-3 EAP-TLS certificate update process
eSpace 7910/7950, upon successful EAP-TLS authentication, automatically updates its device certificate
one month before the EAP-TLS certificate expires.
The certificate update process is as follows:
1. The eSight server applies for a certificate based on the IP phone's serial number (SN)
that has been imported.
2. The IP phone initiates an EAP-TLS authentication request to the RADIUS server.
3. The RADIUS server returns an authentication failure message to the switch and then to
the IP phone.
4. The switch adds the IP phone to the Guest VLAN.
5. The IP phone obtains its IP address and the eSight server IP address from the DHCP
server.
6. The IP phone synchronizes the time with the NTP server.
7. The IP phone obtains its certificate from the eSight server.
8. The IP phone automatically restarts.

9. The IP phone initiates an EAP-TLS certificate to the RADIUS server. Authentication is

successful.
3.3.3 Configuring the VLAN

You can configure the VLAN manually or enable automatic VLAN configuration for eSpace
7910/eSpace 7950.
Automatic Configuration
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) allows switches to deliver VLAN information
carried in LLDP data packets.
The switch in use must support LLDP in order to implement automatic VLAN configuration
for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
To enable LLDP for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 to automatically obtain VLAN information,
perform the following steps:
Step 1 Power on eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
The phone login screen is displayed.
Step 2 On the phone login screen, choose More > Network.
The Network screen is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Network Access > LLDP-MED and press the Enable softkey.
----End
Configuring the VLAN Using Option 132 and Option 133

An IP phone, through its LAN port, can obtain the VLAN ID using DHCP Option 132 and
obtain the VLAN priority using DHCP Option 133. When only Option 132 is configured, the
DHCP server delivers 6 as the value of the VLAN priority by default.
l If a DHCP server installed on the Windows 2008 Server is used, enter the VLAN ID (for
example, 192) for String value of Option 132 and enter the VLAN priority (for example,
6) for String value of Option 133 by referring to 8.3.4 Setting Option 246 Parameters.
l If the switch is used as the DHCP server, enter the VLAN ID (for example, 192) in the
Option 132 field of the DHCP server and enter the VLAN priority (for example, 6) in the
Option 133 field of the DHCP server.
l You must enter hexadecimal values for String value of Option 132 and Option 133; otherwise,
VLAN IDs fail to be delivered.
l The character string in DHCP Option mode contains a maximum of 590 characters.
Manual Configuration
Obtain the VLAN ID and priority from the switch before attempting to manually configure
VLAN information.
To manually configure VLAN information, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Power on eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
The phone login screen is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Network Access > VLAN and press the Enable softkey.
Step 4 Set VLAN ID according to the VLAN ID obtained.
Step 5 Set VLAN Priority according to the VLAN priority obtained and press the Done softkey.
----End
3.3.4 Configuring the Phone IP Address

This section describes how to configure the phone IP address on the eSpace 7910/eSpace
7950 LCD screen.
DHCP
By default, DHCP mode is selected. This allows eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 to obtain an IP
address from the DHCP server.
To enable DHCP on an IPv4 network, perform the following steps:
Step 2 Choose IPv4 Settings > DHCP and press the Select softkey.
----End
Static IP
If a static IP address is required for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, set IPv4 Settings to Static.
Obtain an IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, and DNS address from your network
administrator. To set a static IP address for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, perform the following
steps:
Step 2 Choose IPv4 Settings > Static.
Step 3 Set IP, Gateway, Subnet Mask, and DNS, and press the Done softkey.
----End
PPPoE
If Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) is required for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950,
set IPv4 Settings to PPPoE.

Obtain the user name and password for your PPPoE dialup connection from your network
administrator. To set PPPoE parameters, perform the following steps:

Step 2 Choose IPv4 Settings > PPPoE.
Step 3 Set User Name and Password, and press the Done softkey.
----End

Administrator Guide 4 Selecting a Configuration Method
4 Selecting a Configuration Method
This section describes how to configure IP phones in batches using eSight, TMS, or
Option246 and configure a single IP phone on the web page or LCD screen.
When configuring IP phones in batches, select only one configuration mode to prevent configuration
failures.
4.1 Using eSight

During the deployment, if you want to use eSight to manage IP phones in batches, ensure that
the following conditions are met:
l All IP phones have been connected to the network, and their IP addresses have been
obtained or configured.
l eSight has been deployed, and the user name and password for eSight login have been
obtained.
For details about how to deploy eSight, see the eSight Product Documentation.
This document uses eSight V300R008C00 as an example to describe the batch IP phone
management. Figure 4-1 shows the process of configuring eSight for IP phone management.

Figure 4-1 Process of configuring eSight for IP phone management
4.1.1 Setting STUN Server Parameters

Prerequisites
The STUN server has been deployed.
For details about how to deploy the STUN server, see the eSight Product Documentation.
Background
In an actual network environment, the Application Control Server (ACS) server is generally
deployed on the Internet. IP phones are deployed behind NAT and cannot directly access the
Internet for connecting to the ACS server. In this case, you need to use the Session Traversal

Utilities for NAT (STUN) protocol for NAT traversal so that IP phones can directly
communicate with the ACS server in P2P mode, without forwarding by other public servers.
Since V200R003C30SPC700, when being separated from the ACS server by NAT, IP phones
can use the STUN server as a communication transfer server so that the ACS server can
perform cross-NAT management on IP phones. When IP phones connect to the ACS server,
the ACS server pushes STUN server parameters to IP phones.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the eSight web management system as the administrator.
Step 2 Choose Resource > Collaboration > Terminal Device Management.
Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Terminal Management > System Configuration.
Step 4 In the STUN Server Parameter Configuration area, set Enable STUN to Enable, and set
STUN minimum period (second) and STUN maximum period (second), as shown in
Figure 4-2.
You can deploy a configuration file delivery task to deliver STUN Keep-alive Period to IP phones.
Figure 4-2 Setting STUN server parameters
Table 4-1 STUN server parameter description
Enable STUN Indicates whether to enable the STUN function. When the STUN
function is enabled, the STUN server is used as a communication
transfer server in the NAT environment.
STUN minimum Minimum period for IP phones to periodically send BindingRequest to

period (second) the STUN server.
You are advised to use the default value 10.

STUN Maximum period for IP phones to periodically send BindingRequest to

maximum period the STUN server.
(second) You are advised to use the default value 3600.
STUN server IP Current IP address or domain name of eSight. This parameter does not
address need to be modified.
STUN server The default value is 3478. This parameter does not need to be modified.
port number
----End
Verification
After an IP phone connects to eSight, log in to the phone web page as the administrator,
choose Advanced > TR069, and check the STUN server parameters delivered by eSight, as
shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 STUN server parameters delivered by eSight
4.1.2 Setting Redirection Server Parameters
Background
To provide IP phone users with zero-configuration experience, IP phones support the built-in
redirection server address since V200R003C30SPC700. The redirection server is deployed by

Huawei on the Internet (Huawei public cloud) and is used to deliver the ACS server URL to
IP phones.
The system administrator needs to collect IP phone SNs, create accounts and provision
services on the uPortal based on IP phone SNs, and create the deployment task on the ACS
server in advance. When being powered on for the first time, an IP phone automatically
initiates a request to the redirection server for obtaining the local ACS server URL. When
connecting to the ACS server, the IP phone automatically obtains the account and completes
the registration. In this way, IP phone users only need to power on their IP phones and
connect them to the network to complete the registration and login.
You can set redirection server parameters in either of the following modes:
l Set redirection server parameters on the USM.
l Set redirection server parameters on eSight.
This section describes how to set redirection server parameters on eSight. For details about
how to set redirection server parameters on the USM, see the CloudEC Product
Documentation.
Prerequisites
The redirection server is disabled by default. You need to log in to the eSight and enable the
redirection server first. The procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Use the PuTTY tool to log in to the eSight using the default user name and password (root
and Changeme123, respectively).
Step 2 Run the cd /opt/eSight/AppBase/etc/uc command and press Enter.
Step 3 Run the vi configcenter.properties command and press Enter.
Step 4 Press Insert and set configcenter.enable to true.
Step 5 Press Esc to exit the editing status.
Step 6 Enter the :wq command to exit.
Step 7 Restart the eSight.
----End
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Resource > Collaboration > Terminal Device Management.
Step 3 Add the ACS server.

1. Choose Terminal Device Management > Redirect Center > Config Server.
2. Click Add.
3. Set Server Name and ACS Url, as shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Adding a server
Step 4 Add a terminal.

1. Choose Terminal Device Management > Redirect Center > Terminal.
2. Click Add.
3. Enter an IP phone SN and select a server, as shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Adding a terminal
----End
4.1.3 Creating an IP Phone Group

All IP phones that connect to eSight are added to the default group to be managed centrally.
The administrator can move IP phones to specified groups based on O&M requirements.
For enterprises whose IP addresses are allocated according to certain rules, it is recommended
that they group IP phones by the IP address segment. A group can relate to one or multiple IP
address segments.
eSight can automatically categorize all managed IP phones based on their IP addresses. In this
way, IP phones can be configured or upgraded in batches.

Procedure
Step 2 On the menu bar, choose Resource > Collaboration > Terminal Device Management.
Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Terminal Management > Resource Management
> Group Management.
Step 4 On the tab page that is displayed, select IP Address Group under Group List and click
Create.
Figure 4-6 Configuring an IP phone group
----End
Verification
The new group is displayed under IP Address Group.
Figure 4-7 Verifying the IP phone group creation
4.1.4 Managing IP Phone Number Resources

IP phone number resource management allows you to preset and manage IP phone number
resources on the eSight and configure the automatic number allocation function for eSpace
7900 series IP phones of V200R003C00 or later.

Background
l The automatic number allocation function is available only for eSpace 7900 series IP phones of
V200R003C00 or later.
l In the IMS+UC network environment, IP phones do not support number allocation using eSight.
Automatic number allocation supports two modes: eSight Dispatch Number and uPortal
Dispatch Number.
l eSight
– You can bind a number to the SN or MAC address of an IP phone. Then eSight can
allocate the number to the IP phone based on the bound SN or MAC address during
automatic number allocation. The numbers and identifiers are in one-to-one
mappings.
– If the numbers and identifiers are not bound, eSight allocates a random number
within the number segment to an IP phone.
NOTICE
If the IP phone identifier is changed, for example, from Serial Number to MAC
Address, the allocated number becomes invalid, and eSight needs to allocate a new
number to the IP phone.
l uPortal
In the EC6.0 solution or later, select uPortal Dispatch Number for the uPortal to
allocate numbers.
When allocating numbers using the uPortal, ensure that the device IDs of the IP phones are bound
to the corresponding numbers on the uPortal. For details, see the CloudEC Product
Documentation.
Setting IP Phone Number Allocation Parameters

Step 2 Choose Resource > Collaboration > Terminal Device Management from the main menu.
Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose System Configuration.
Step 4 Under Support Number Allocation, set IP phone number allocation parameters.
l If Switch of Number Allocation is set to ON and Type of Dispatch Number is set
based on actual conditions, the eSight actively allocates numbers to IP phones according
to the defined IP phone number allocation policy.
– If eSight will be used for number allocation, select eSight Dispatch Number and
select MAC Address or Serial Number as prompted.
– If the uPortal will be used for number allocation, select uPortal Dispatch Number.
l If Switch of Number Allocation is set to OFF, the IP phone number allocation function
is disabled.

Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Importing IP Phone Number Resources (Optional)

To use eSight to allocate numbers to IP phones, you need to record number resources into
eSight first.
Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Terminal Management > Resource Management >
Terminal Number.
Step 4 On the Terminal Number tab page, record IP phone number resources.
l Manually add IP phone number resources.
a. Click Add and set parameters.
b. Click OK.
The newly added IP phone numbers are displayed on the interface.
l Import IP phone number resources in batches.
a. Click . Open the

downloaded template file, enter parameters following the template instructions, and
save the settings.
b. Click Import, select the configured template, and click OK.
The newly added IP phone numbers are displayed on the interface.
----End
4.1.5 Managing Configuration Files

Configuration file management allows you to modify common parameters in the
configuration file template to batch modify IP phone configuration parameters. The
configuration files can be used when IP phones are deployed either automatically or manually.
Prerequisites
l For eSpace 7910 IP phones, you must compress the IP phone configuration file Config-
eSpace7910.xml and the eSightUI-EC60.xml file into a ZIP package. This package will
be used as the configuration file template.
l For eSpace 7950 IP phones, you must compress the IP phone configuration file Config-
eSpace7950.xml and the eSightUI-EC60.xml file into a ZIP package. This package will
be used as the configuration file template.
l Log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, download the software package of the

corresponding IP phone model and version, and decompress the package to obtain the preceding
files.
l Directly compress files without including any folders.

Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Terminal Management > Deployment
Management > Configuration File.
Step 3 Upload the configuration file template.
1. Click File Template Manager and then Upload.
2. On the Upload Configuration File Template page, set Device Model and File
Template, and upload the configuration file template of the corresponding version, as
Figure 4-8 Uploading the configuration file template
Step 4 Create a configuration file.

1. In the navigation tree on the left, choose Deployment Management > Configuration
File.
2. Click Create.
3. In the Basic Information area, customize File Name and Device Model, and select the
configuration file template from the File Template drop-down list box. The
Configuration area is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 Creating a configuration file

4. Click to expand the 79xx Configuration area and set all parameters.
For IP phones in factory default settings, set the following basic parameters. For IP phones not in
factory default settings, set required parameters on corresponding tab page based on the site
requirements.
a. Select a configuration policy.

n When Configuring Policy is set to Full, all parameters are valid in the
configuration file that is generated, and all the parameter values are delivered
to the IP phones of the matching models.
n When Configuring Policy is set to Specified item, only selected parameters
are valid in the configuration file that is generated, and the selected parameter
values are delivered to the IP phones of the matching models. The parameters
that are not selected remain unchanged.
Set Configuring Policy to Full if the automatic number allocation function needs to be
enabled. Otherwise, automatic number allocation is unavailable during automatic
deployment.
Figure 4-10 Setting the configuration policy
b. (Optional) Set Network parameters.

For an office that has not deployed the DHCP server, set IPv4 Network Access
Mode to Static IP on the Network tab page, as shown in Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-11 Network configuration
c. Set TR069 parameters, as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Setting TR069 parameters
Table 4-2 TR069 parameter description

Parameter Setting
ACS User Enter the user name used by eSight to authenticate IP phones.
Name The value must be the same as the authentication user name
configured in the eSight configuration file.
Default value: eSight.
ACS Password Enter the password used by eSight to authenticate IP phones.

The value must be the same as the authentication password
configured in the eSight configuration file.
Default value: eSight*123.

Parameter Setting
ACS Address Enter the TR-069 address of eSight.

n In the encrypted transmission scenario, enter https://eSight
server IP address:8444/tr069/services/acs.
n In the non-encrypted transmission scenario, enter http://
eSight server IP address:8089/tr069/services/acs.
n From the V200R003C30SPC700 version, IP phones support
bidirectional authentication during access to eSight. If an IP
phone uses bidirectional authentication for accessing
eSight, enter https://eSight server address:32241/
tr069double/services/acs.
NOTE
n HTTP is an insecure protocol. You are advised to use HTTPS. If
you must use HTTP, disable it immediately after it is used. The
method of enabling HTTP on the eSight server is as follows:
1. Use the PuTTY tool to log in to the eSight using the default
user name and password (root and Changeme123,
respectively).
2. Run the cd /opt/eSight/AppBase/etc/uc command and press
Enter.
3. Run the vi ems_config_readWriter.properties command and
press Enter.
4. Press Insert and set supportHttp to true.
5. Press Esc to exit the editing status.
6. Enter the :wq command to exit.
n If ACS Address is configured as follows, set HTTPS Client
Authentication to Disable in Set Others parameters to prevent the
IP phone from failing to connect to eSight:
○ The value of ACS Address is in IP address format.
○ The domain name in ACS Address is different from the value
of Common Name in the eSight server certificate.
CPE User Enter the user name used by IP phones to authenticate eSight.
Name You do not need to set this parameter on eSight. IP phones
report the user name to eSight.
Default value: huawei
CPE Password Enter the password used by IP phones to authenticate eSight.

You do not need to set this parameter on eSight. IP phones
report the password to eSight.
Default value: huawei123

Parameter Setting
(Optional) Interval for the IP phone to send BindingRequest messages to

STUN Keep- the STUN server.
alive Period Set the parameter based on the onsite number of users. If the
SBC is deployed onsite, the STUN keep-alive period needs to
be shorter than the NAT table item aging interval.
Default value: 150
Unit: s
NOTE
This parameter is mandatory when the eSight manages the IP phone
cross the NAT.
d. Set Server parameters, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 Setting server parameters

Table 4-3 Server parameter description

Parameter Setting
Network Environment Select a network environment based on the site

requirements.
Login Mode Select an IP phone login mode.

n In an EC6.X network environment, Account is
selected by default.
n In other network environments, Phone number
is selected by default.
NOTE
If the number is allocated by eSight, set this parameter to
Phone number.
SIP Server 1 n In a UC2.X network environment, enter the

U1900 server address.
n In an IMS network environment, this parameter
is set by the administrator.
n In a CC network environment, the SIP server can
be the U2900, UAP3300, or SBC.
n In a third-party SIP server network environment,
enter the IP address of the third-party SIP server.
uPortal Server (EC6.X) Enter uPortal IP address or uPortal domain name.

Set the port number to 443.
NOTE
n The uPortal server supports HTTPS by default.
n The uPortal server address can be set to an IP address
or a domain name. If it is set to a domain name, you
need to configure the DNS server address in Set
network parameters.
AA Server1 (IMS+UC) Enter the AA server address.
(Optional) Profile Server Enter the personal configuration file server address.
1 n In the encrypted transmission scenario, enter
https://eSight server IP address and set the port
number to 38444 or 9444.
n In the non-encrypted transmission scenario, enter
http://eSight server IP address and set the port
number to 38081.
NOTE
n The personal configuration file server is used to upload
and download personal configuration files.
n HTTP is an insecure protocol. You are advised to use
HTTPS.
e. Set System parameters, as shown in Figure 4-14.

n You can configure the language based on the site requirements.

n When SIP Transport is set to TLS in Set SIP signaling parame..., you need to
configure the time server or manually set the time to the current time to prevent IP phone
registration failure.
n To ensure that the setting of Wallpaper File Name takes effect, you need to upload the
wallpaper with the same name when managing version files.
Figure 4-14 Setting system parameters
f. (Optional) Set SIP Signaling parameters, as shown in Figure 4-15.
When SIP Transport is set to TLS, you need to configure the time server in Set System
parameters or manually set the time to the current time to prevent IP phone registration
failure.

Figure 4-15 SIP signaling parameters
g. (Optional) Set Others parameters, as shown in Figure 4-16.
n To ensure data transmission security, you are advised to enable HTTP client
authentication.
n After HTTPS client authentication is enabled, when an IP phone accesses eSight, the
eSight server certificate and the Common Name field in the certificate need to be
verified. To prevent IP phone access failure, set ACS Address in Set TR069
parameters to https://eSight domain name:8444/tr069/services/acs or http://eSight
domain name:8089/tr069/services/acs. The domain name in the URL must be the same
as the value of Common Name in the certificate.
Figure 4-16 Enabling HTTPS client authentication
Step 5 Set other parameters on each tab page based on the site requirements.
Step 6 After the parameters are set correctly, click OK.

If you can find the new configuration file on the Configuration File Management page, the
operation is successful, as shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Configuration File Management
l When the configuration files are successfully uploaded, you can select AutoDeploy if needed.
l The configuration files specified on the Automatic Deployment > Policy Configuration page take
precedence over those with AutoDeploy selected on the configuration file management page. The
latter ones are used only when the automatic deployment page has no configuration file specified.
----End
4.1.6 Managing Version Files

Version file management allows you to upgrade IP phone version files in batches. The version
files can be used when IP phones are deployed either automatically or manually.
Prerequisites
The software package of the IP phone to be upgraded is available.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Terminal Management > Deployment
Management > Version File.
Step 3 Click Upload and set version file parameters, as shown in Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18 Setting version file parameters

Table 4-4 Parameter description

Parameter Description How to Set
Device Model Model of IP phones Select the IP phone model to be upgraded from the
that support version drop-down list box.
management.
File type Type of the version Select the file types as required.
file to upload.
Version file Version file to issue. Select the required version file.
Select a version file in .zip format. The version file
contains the main program, language package,
signal tone, and certificate file.
l Extract files from the software package.
The .bin file that is obtained is the main
program.
l Make a language package file, compress it into
a .tar file, and rename it language.tar.
For details, see the eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP
Phone Language Package Customization
Guide.
l Obtain a signal tone file in .wav format,
compress it into a .tar file, and rename it
signal.tar.
l Obtain certificate files in .pem format.
You can select the required packages to compress
them into a .zip package and upload the .zip
package to the eSight.
NOTE
Directly compress the selected packages to a .zip
package. You do not need to place them into a folder and
then compress the folder; otherwise, the upgrade may
fail.
Version Name that identifies You are advised to use a name that demonstrates
the uploaded version the IP phone model and usage.
file. NOTE
If the uploaded version files for IP phones are in .bin
format, the system automatically recognizes the version
number from the corresponding version file and fills in
the version number in this parameter.
Enter the real version number of the IP phone in
VxxxRxxxCxxSPCxxx format.
For example: V200R003C30SPC700

Wallpaper and Wallpaper and l Select a wallpaper file in .jpg, .bmp or .png
ringtone ringtone files to format. The maximum resolution of a
issue. wallpaper is 800 x 600. The size of wallpapers
to be issued each time must be smaller than 2
MB. A maximum of eight custom wallpapers
are supported.
l Select a ringtone file (sample rate: 8 kHz;
precision: 16–bit) in .wav format. The size of
ringtones to be issued each time must be
smaller than 2 MB.
NOTE
l The file name cannot contain the following
characters: ; / ? : @ # ' & = + $ ,.
l Before issuing wallpaper or ringtone files in batches,
you are advised to import wallpaper or ringtone files
into the IP phone using web mode to see whether
they are available.
l The total size of wallpaper and ringtone files must be
smaller than 10 MB.
l The wallpaper and configuration file of the target
version must be uploaded to eSight and delivered to
the IP phone of the target version.
Step 4 Click OK.

The eSight uploads the version file to the file server. You can view the new version file on the
Version File page.
----End
4.1.7 Deploying IP Phones in Batches

IP phones can be deployed in batches either manually or automatically. Manual deployment
applies to deployment of existing IP phones, and automatic deployment applies to IP phones
deployed at a new site.
4.1.7.1 Deploying IP Phones Manually
Prerequisites
IP phones have been connected to eSight. For detail, see 4.1.8 Configuring the Connection
Between an IP Phone and eSight.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the eSight web management system. On the menu bar, choose Resource >
Collaboration > Terminal Device Management.
Step 2 In the pane on the left of the Terminal Management tab page, choose Terminal
Management > Deployment Management > Manual Deployment.

Step 3 On the Manual Deployment tab page, click Create.
Step 4 Under Task Set, set Task Name and click Next.
Figure 4-19 Create Task
Step 5 Under Select Device, click Add.
Step 6 In the Select Resource window, select a group or IP phones.

l You can select any group under Select Group. Deployment will be performed on IP
phones in the selected group, as shown in Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-20 Selecting a group
l You can select one or multiple IP phones under Select Terminal. Deployment will be
performed only on selected phones, as shown in Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Selecting IP phones
You can select a group under Select Group and one or multiple IP phones under Select IP
PHONE at the same time. It is recommended that you reserve 0.5 Mbit/s bandwidth for each IP
phone in concurrent deployment.
Step 7 Click OK.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 Under Select Upgrade Type, select Main Firmware and Configuration File, as shown in
Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22 Selecting a task type
Since V200R003C30SPC700, IP phones not in factory default settings can check whether there is a new
version during restart and implement automatic upgrade. In this case, set the task type to Reboot.
Step 10 Under Select Upgrade Type, select an upgrade type based on the site requirements, as shown
in Figure 4-23.

Figure 4-23 Selecting an upgrade type
l For manual deployment, you need to select at least Main Firmware or Configuration File.
Otherwise, you cannot proceed to the next step.
l If you need to manually deliver numbers, you must also upgrade the configuration file.
l From the V200R003C30SPC700 version, batch number delivery through eSight is supported during
manual IP phone deployment. Before creating the number delivery task, you need to record number
resources into eSight first. For details about how to record number resources into eSight, see 4.1.4
Managing IP Phone Number Resources.
l Upgrading the main firmware
a. Under Select Upgrade Type, select Main Firmware.
b. In the Target Version/File column under Version File Upgrade, select the target
version file that has been uploaded. For details about how to upload a version file,
see 4.1.6 Managing Version Files.
l Upgrading the configuration file

a. Under Select Upgrade Type, select Configuration File.
configuration file that has been uploaded. For details about how to upload a
configuration file, see 4.1.5 Managing Configuration Files.
l Delivering numbers
a. Under Select Upgrade Type, select Configuration File and Dispatch Number.
If Switch of Number Allocation is set to uPortal dispatch Number, the Dispatch

Number option is not displayed in Select Upgrade Type.
configuration file that has been uploaded. For details about how to upload a
configuration file, see 4.1.5 Managing Configuration Files. For details about how

to record number resources into eSight, see 4.1.4 Managing IP Phone Number
Resources.
Step 11 Click Next. The confirmation page is displayed.
Step 12 Confirm the deployment and click Finish.
----End
Verification
Step 2 In the pane on the left of the tab page, choose Terminal Management > Deployment
Management > Manual Deployment.
On the Manual Deployment tab page, the manual deployment task status is displayed.
----End
4.1.7.2 Deploying IP Phones Automatically

Automatic deployment applies to new sites where new IP phones are to be deployed in
batches. Automatic deployment supports the number allocation function.
Procedure
Step 2 In the pane on the left of the Terminal Management tab page, choose Deployment
Management > Automatic Deployment Management.
Step 3 On the Automatic Deployment tab pate, click in the row of the IP phone group to be
deployed.

l If Type of dispatchNumber is set to uPortal dispatchNumber, the Allocated Number Segment

configuration item will not be displayed on the automatic deployment configuration page.
l If you need to use the automatic number allocation function, you must select configuration files that
are generated when Configuring Policy is set to Full; otherwise, the automatic number allocation
during automatic deployment fails.
l If the administrator has changed the passwords of user numbers on the BMU, synchronize number
resources on eSight before automatically allocating numbers; otherwise, number allocation may fail.
l Upgrading the main firmware

Click in the Associate Version File column of the IP phone group to select version
files for IP phone models involved in the IP phone group. For details about how to
upload a version file, see 4.1.6 Managing Version Files.
l Upgrading the configuration file
Click in the Associate Configuration File column of the IP phone group to select
configuration files for IP phone models involved in the IP phone group. For details about
how to upload a configuration file, see 4.1.5 Managing Configuration Files.
l Delivering numbers
Click in the Allocated Number Segment column of the IP phone group to set the
number segment of numbers to be allocated. For details about how to upload a
configuration file, see 4.1.5 Managing Configuration Files. For details about how to
record number resources into eSight, see 4.1.4 Managing IP Phone Number
Resources.
Step 4 (Optional) Click in the Subnet Bandwidth column of the IP phone group to set the
maximum bandwidth that the subnet can use during IP phone deployment.
l It is recommended that you reserve 0.5 Mbit/s bandwidth for each IP phone in concurrent
deployment.
l You are NOT advised to deploy more than 100 IP phones simultaneously.
----End
Viewing the Automatic Deployment Task

In the pane on the left of the tab page, choose Deployment Management > Automatic
Deployment > Task View. On the Automatic Deployment tab page, the automatic
deployment task status is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24 Viewing the deployment task status
The automatic deployment task is named Auto Deploy Task by eSight.

4.1.8 Configuring the Connection Between an IP Phone and

eSight
Before connecting an IP phone to eSight, set TR069 parameters on the IP phone.
l Set TR069 parameters. For details, see 4.1.8.1 Setting Parameters for Connecting to
eSight.
– If a domain name service (DNS) server is available onsite, configure the mapping
between the eSight domain name and IP address on the DNS server to complete
TR069 parameter settings.
– If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is available onsite, set the
DHCP Option246 field to batch deliver TR069 parameters.
– If neither a DNS server nor DHCP server is available onsite, manually set TR069
parameters on the web page or liquid crystal display (LCD) screen of an IP phone.
l Obtain TR069 parameters. For details, see 4.1.8.2 Configuring the Access Scan
Function of eSight.
If neither a DNS server nor DHCP server is available onsite and a great number of IP
phones are deployed, use the access scan function to batch set TR069 parameters.
l In an office with the NAT environment, you need to set STUN server parameters first. For
details, see 4.1.1 Setting STUN Server Parameters.
l If the redirection server is deployed onsite, you do not need to connect IP phones to the ACS
server. IP phones automatically obtain the ACS server URL from the redirection server.
l For eSpace 7910/7950 IP phones of the V200R003C00 version, if they fail to connect to
eSight V200R008C00SPC200 or a later version, consult the eSight Product Documentation
and refer to Operation and Maintenance > Operation Guide > Terminal Management>
FAQ and Troubleshooting > How Do I Do If IP Phones of the Old Version Cannot Be
Connected to eSight Through the TR069 Protocol for processing.
4.1.8.1 Setting Parameters for Connecting to eSight

This section describes how to set parameters for connecting eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 to
eSight for unified management.
Context
l If a DHCP server has been deployed, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 obtains the Application
Control Server (ACS) IP address (carried in the Option 246 field) and its own IP address
from the DHCP server. eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 then resolves the ACS server address
to obtain the eSight IP address. According to the eSight server IP address, eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950 automatically sends a request for connecting to eSight. Once eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950 is connected to eSight, its information is displayed on the eSight
management portal.
l If a DNS server has been deployed, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 obtains the DNS server
address and its own IP address from the DHCP server, and sends a request to the DNS
server for resolving the enterprise domain name (for example, ucems.company.com)
into the eSight IP address. According to the eSight IP address, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
automatically sends a request for connecting to eSight. Once eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
is connected to eSight, its information is displayed on the eSight management portal.

l If neither a DHCP server nor the DNS server is available, you need to specify a static IP
address for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 on its LCD screen first and manually set the ACS
IP address to the eSight IP address for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
Connecting to eSight Using DHCP

eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 is able to resolve the value of acs.address carried in the DHCP
Option 246 field to obtain the eSight IP address.
l If the DHCP server installed on the Windows Server 2008 is used, set String value for
the Option 246 field to acs.address=http://ACS server IP address:Port number/tr069/
services/acs or acs.address=https://ACS server IP address:Port number/tr069/
services/acs, for example, acs.address=http://192.168.1.37:8089/tr069/services/acs or
acs.address=https://192.168.1.37:8444/tr069/services/acs. For details about the setting,
see 8.3.4 Setting Option 246 Parameters.
l If a switch is used as the DHCP server, set the DHCP server's Option 246 field to
acs.address=http://ACS server IP address:Port number/tr069/services/acs or
acs.address=https://ACS server IP address:Port number/tr069/services/acs, for
example, acs.address=http://192.168.1.37:8089/tr069/services/acs or
acs.address=https://192.168.1.37:8444/tr069/services/acs.
l HTTP is an insecure protocol. You are advised to use HTTPS.

l If HTTPS client authentication has been enabled, the ACS address format is https://eSight domain
name:8444/tr069/services/acs or http://eSight domain name:8089/tr069/services/acs, and the eSight
domain name in the URL must be the same as the value of Common Name in the eSight server
certificate.
Connecting to eSight Using DNS

If a DNS server has been deployed, add the default domain name ucems.company.com to the
DNS server and map ucems.company.com to the eSight IP address. For details about how to
add a DNS domain name, see 8.6 Setting Up the AD and DNS Servers.
If you have added the domain name, right-click the domain name and choose Properties from
the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-25. In the window that is displayed, set the IP
address of the domain name to the eSight IP address.
Figure 4-25 Modifying domain name settings on the DNS server

l If you want to change the default domain name ucems.company.com to your enterprise domain
name, for example, example.com, enter example.com (company is a variable, which is the name of
your company) in the Option 15 field of the DHCP server. The IP phone then automatically changes
the domain name from the factory default (ucems.company.com) to ucems.example.com and
changes the ACS address from the factory default (https://ucems.company.com/tr069/services/acs)
to https://ucems.example.com /tr069/services/acs.
l In the VFOneNet network environment, the Option 15 field is not supported.
Connecting to eSight in Manual Mode

For eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, the factory default of the ACS address is https://
ucems.company.com:8444/tr069/services/acs. In manual connection mode, replace
ucems.company.com with the eSight IP address according to the data plan.
The administrator can set ACS server parameters on the LCD screen or phone web page.
l On the phone login screen, choose Network > Server > ACS Server and modify the
settings of ACS parameters.
l On the phone web page, choose Advanced > TR069 and modify the settings of ACS
parameters. For details, see 6.4.10 TR069.
4.1.8.2 Configuring the Access Scan Function of eSight
Context
When a great number of IP phones connect to the eSight, the eSight uses the access scan
function to send auto-configuration server (ACS) addresses and certificate paths to the IP
phones. After IP phones automatically update their configurations based on the information
received from the eSight, the IP phones automatically connect to corresponding IP phone
group.
l Devices that are scanned for may not be IP phones because the eSight cannot distinguish
device types from the information sent by the scanned devices during scan access. This
results in that the number of scanned devices is different from the number of connected
IP phones.
l If you restart the eSight when an access scan task is running, the task will not continue
after the restart. You must manually stop the task and start the task again.
Prerequisites
l An IP phone group has been created.
l IP phones of the correct models and versions are available.
Procedure
Step 3 In the navigation tree on the left, choose Terminal Management > Resource Management >
Terminal Resource.

Step 4 Click Access Scan.
Step 5 (Optional) Configure CPE user name and password.
1. Click .
The Config page is displayed.
2. Modify CPE User Name and CPE Password based on IP Phone device, click Confirm.
The default values of CPE User Name and CPE Password are huawei and huawei123,
respectively.
3. Perform access scan for IP phones in the preset network segment using any of the
following three methods:
– (Recommended) Immediate scan
– Scheduled scan: periodic scan, daily scan, and monthly scan
n Periodic scan: periodically scans IP phones according to the preset period.
n Daily scan: starts scanning at the preset time every day.
n Weekly scan: starts scanning at certain time of a certain day every week.
– Both immediate scan and scheduled scan: immediately scans IP phones first, and
then periodically scans IP phones.
Step 6 Set scan parameters.

1. Click Add in Scan Parameters.
The Select Terminal Group page is displayed.
2. Click Add.
3. Select Select Group from the navigation tree on the left. In the Available resources
area, select the IP phone group that is created, and click OK.
The Select Terminal Group page is displayed.
4. Click Next. The Set Scan Segments page is displayed.
5. Click Confirm.
Step 7 Configure access scan.

1. Select the network segment where IP phones that need to connect to eSight through
access scan reside.
2. Click Start.
----End
Result
On the Terminal Device Management > Terminal Management > Terminal Resource
page, you can check the IP phone access status.
4.2 Using TMS

4.2.1 Deployment Process

The core network Data Management System (TMS9950) helps system operators automate
system operations and integrates operations including subscription, preconfiguration,
configuration, and management of Internet devices and services.
This section describes how to use the TMS to deliver upgrade and configuration files and
allocate numbers to eSpace 7910/7950 IP phones in V200R003C30 or later.
Figure 4-26 shows the process for the TMS to deploy IP phones.
Figure 4-26 Deployment process
The administrator can create IP phone management domains based on O&M requirements
and connect IP phones in domains to the TMS. The TMS upgrades the IP phone firmware
version, delivers configuration files to, and allocates numbers to IP phones using the TR-069
script.
4.2.2 Creating an IP Phone Management Domain

The TMS manages devices such as IP phones through management domains. On the TMS,
when no management domain is created except the root domain, which is the default
management domain, a new device is automatically added to the root domain. When there are
other management domains except the root domain, a new device can be added to one of
these domains. It is recommended that you create a management domain to uniformly manage
IP phones.
Prerequisites
l You have established the TMS environment.
l You have obtained a TMS account.
l The IP phone networking environment is set to IMS.
l TR-069 parameters including ACS User Name, ACS Password, and ACS Address
have been set on IP phones.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the TMS as the administrator. On the login page, select TR to log in to the system.
Step 2 Choose System Management > Admin Domain and click Add, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Button for creating a management domain
Step 3 In the Adding Domain area, enter a domain name you prefer and click Submit, as shown in
Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-28 Creating a management domain
----End
Verification
Under Admin Domain, the new management domain is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 New management domain
4.2.3 Uploading Basic IP Phone Information
Prerequisites
Before connecting IP phones to the TMS, obtain the following basic information:
Files
l DD: device description file
If notifypassword in the DD file is left empty, enter the default password huawei123 for this parameter,
as shown in Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 notifyPassword
l rule: binding rules

l mapping: order parameter mapping rules
To obtain the preceding files, log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, download the software

package of the corresponding IP phone model and version, and go to the dms folder obtained after the
software package is decompressed.
Parameters
l OUI: device type

l SN: device SN
l ModelName: IP phone model

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the TMS as the root user.
On the login page, select TR to log in to the system.
Step 2 Click the Subscriber/Device Inventory tab.
Step 3 On the Subscriber/Device Inventory tab page, under Device Type Inventory, click Add.
Step 4 Upload the device description file, binding rules, and order parameter mapping rules, as
To ensure that DD, rule, and mapping can be successfully uploaded, use a text editing tool to open
these files and change the firmwareVersion field to DEFAULT. Then change the firmwareVersion
field to its original value and upload the files again.
Figure 4-31 Uploading files
Table 4-5 File names

File Type File Name
Descriptor VALUE_DD
Binding Rule VALUE_RULE
Order Parameter Mapping VALUE_MAPPING

Rule
Step 5 Click Submit.
----End
4.2.4 Adding an IP Phone to a Management Domain

Before managing IP phones on the TMS, you need to add IP phones to a management
domain. In the EC6.0 solution or a later version, the uPortal adds IP phones to the
corresponding management domain. No operation is needed on the TMS. For details about
how to enable IP phones to be automatically added to a management domain, see the
CloudEC Product Documentation.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the TMS and click the Subscriber/Device Inventory tab. In the pane on the left of
the window, click Device Inventory, as shown in Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 Adding a device
Step 2 Click Add.
Step 3 Set Device Log and Admin Domain.

The user identity is automatically generated, as shown in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-33 Setting device parameters

The value of Device ID is in format of manufacturer code_IP phone SN. The manufacturer code of
Huawei eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 is 001E10. To obtain the manufacturer code of other vendors' IP
phones, see the corresponding IP phone manual.
----End
Verification
On the Subscriber/Device Inventory tab page, under Device Inventory, the added IP phone
is displayed.
4.2.5 Upgrading IP Phones (Optional)

Procedure
Step 1 Choose the Subscriber/Device Inventory > Firmware Inventory.
Step 2 Click Add and add a firmware file, as shown in Figure 4-34.
l The firmware version name must be the actual version name. You can open the DD file using a text
editor and search for firmwareVersion to obtain the firmware version name. For example, if
<firmwareVersion>V200R003C30SPC200B021</firmwareVersion> is found, the firmware
version name is V200R003C30SPC200B021.
l The version file to be uploaded must be in .bin format.
l If the upload fails due to the excess file size, modify the maximum permitted firmware file size
under System Management > Preferences > Firmware Upgrade Settings.
Figure 4-34 Adding a firmware file
Step 3 Click the Subscriber/Device Search tab, find and select the IP phones to be upgraded, click
Apply, and access the Subscriber/Device Operation tab page.
You can select multiple IP phones of the same model, click Apply All, and execute the scripts
in batches for batch deployment.
Step 4 Choose F/W Upgrade from the navigation tree on the left and click Continue in the pane on
the right, as shown in Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 Firmware upgrade
Step 5 Select the firmware version to be upgraded and click Next, as shown in Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 Selecting the firmware version
Step 6 Create an upgrade task and click Finish.
Figure 4-37 Setting a task
----End
Verification
Choose Subscriber/Device Operation > Actions. Query the created task on the page that is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-38.

Figure 4-38 Upgrade task
4.2.6 Configuring IP Phones (Optional)

When you use the TMS to configure IP phones in a management domain, you need to run the
TR-069 script to deliver configuration files to the IP phones.
4.2.6.1 Creating a TR-069 Script
Prerequisites
l You have set up the HTTP server.
l You have obtained the upgrade and configuration files for the target version.
Log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise, choose Support > Enterprise

Communications > Endpoints , click the corresponding IP phone model, and download the
documents of the corresponding version.
Procedure
This section describes how to create a TR-069 script on the TMS.
Step 1 Log in to the TMS and click the Subscriber/Device Inventory tab. On the Subscriber/
Device Inventory tab page, under TR-069 Script, click Add, as shown in Figure 4-39.
l If you have an existing .xml file containing TR-069 scripts, click Import to directly
import the .xml file into the TMS.
l If you want to create an .xml file containing TR-069 scripts, log in to http://
support.huawei.com/enterprise/, download the software package of the corresponding IP
phone model and version, obtain the ipphone_tr069script_demo.xml template file in
the dms folder obtained after the software package is decompressed, and enter TR-069
parameters according to the samples in the template. For details about the TR-069
parameters and their values, see the TR-069 Configuration Parameter Description.

Figure 4-39 Creating a TR-069 script
Step 2 Under Add TR-069 Script, set parameters and click Add, as shown in Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40 Setting TR-069 script parameters
Step 3 In the Add TR-069 Script Entry area, perform the following operations:
1. Set TR-069 Method Name to SetParamterValues.
2. Add parameters and set related parameter types and values, as shown in Figure 4-41.
The successfully added parameters are displayed in the lower part.
a. For the IP phones that are newly delivered, set the basic parameters described in
Table 4-6.
b. For the phones that are restored to factory settings, deliver related parameters based
on the site requirements.
– For details about TR-069 names, types, and values, see the TR-069 Configuration Parameter
Description.
– To set the IP address of the IP phone through the TMS, deliver the corresponding TR-069
parameters in the Device.ComCfg.Access.LAN. path.

Figure 4-41 Creating a TR-069 script entry
Table 4-6 TR-069 parameter description

Parameter Parameter on the ACS Type Value
Name
SIP server Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(256 example.com:

address eProfile.SIP.RegistrarServer ) CloudUSM
domain name
Proxy server Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(256 Signaling IP

address eProfile.SIP.OutboundProxy ) address of the
CloudUSM
Network Device.UserInterface.X_001E10_E unsignedI 10: EC6.X

environment nvironment nt network
environment
Login mode Device.UserInterface.X_001E10_L unsignedI 1: Account

oginMode nt
NMS type Device.UserInterface.X_001E10_T unsignedI 1: TMS

R069Cfg.X_001E10_Type nt

Parameter Parameter on the ACS Type Value

Name
isAutoCreate Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic unsignedI 0: disable

Linekey eProfile.SIP.X_001E10_Uportal.X nt NOTE
_001E10_TMSAutoCreateLineKey In the EC6.X
network
environment, set
this parameter to
0. Then the line
button settings are
delivered by the
uPortal. In the
other scenarios, if
the server cannot
deliver the line
button settings,
set this parameter
to 1. Then the IP
phone
automatically
generates line
button settings.
Step 4 Click Submit. The Add TR-069 Script page is displayed.
Step 5 Check the newly added script on the TR-069 Script page.
----End
4.2.6.2 Running a TR-069 Script
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the TMS. In the left pane on the right of the Subscriber/Device Search tab page,
select the management domain.
Step 2 Under Subscriber ID, select IP phones that you want to configure and click Apply, as shown
in Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42 Selecting devices
If selecting multiple IP phones of the same model, you can run the script on selected IP phones to deploy
them in batches.
Step 3 On the Subscriber/Device Operation tab page, select TR-069 Script.
Step 4 Select the device firmware version and click Next.
Figure 4-43 Selecting the device firmware version
Step 5 Select the script to run and click Next, as shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Selecting the TR-069 script
Step 6 Under Task Setting, set task parameters and click Finish, as shown in Figure 4-45.

Figure 4-45 Setting task parameters
----End
Verification
On the Subscriber/Device Operation tab page, select Actions History.
The task status is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-46.
Figure 4-46 Actions History
4.2.7 Allocating Numbers

Run the TR-069 script to allocate numbers to IP phones. The script parameter settings are
different from those in section 4.2.6 Configuring IP Phones (Optional). In the EC6.0
solution, the uPortal allocates numbers.
4.2.7.1 Creating a TR-069 Script
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the office's number resources.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the TMS and click the Subscriber/Device Inventory tab. On the Subscriber/
Device Inventory tab page, under TR-069 Script, click Add, as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47 Creating a TR-069 script
Step 2 Under Add TR-069 Script, set Script Name, Admin Domain, and Binding Device Type,
and click Add, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Figure 4-48 Creating a TR-069 script item
Step 3 In the Add TR-069 Script Entry dialog box, set TR-069 method name to
SetParameterValues, as shown in Figure 4-49.
Figure 4-49 Creating a TR-069 script entry
Step 4 Set Parameter Name, Type, and Value and click Add, as shown in Figure 4-50.
You can add multiple parameters to a TR-069 script. For details about TR-069 names, types,
and values, see the TR-069 Configuration Parameter Description..

Figure 4-50 Setting parameters
----End
4.2.7.2 Running a TR-069 Script

For details, see section 4.2.6.2 Running a TR-069 Script.
4.3 Using DHCP Option 246
4.3.1 Batch Configuration

This section describes how to configure eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s in batches using DHCP
Option 246.
Prerequisites
You have prepared the following items:
l HTTP file server
For details about how to configure an HTTP file server, see 8.5 Setting Up an HTTP
Server.
l DHCP server
– You can use a switch to function as a DHCP server.
– You can also configure a DHCP server on the Windows Server 2008 or Windows
Server 2012. For details, see 8.3.1 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the
Windows Server 2008 or 8.3.2 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the
Windows Server 2012.
This section uses how to configure a DHCP server on the Windows Server 2008 as
an example.
l Version file, configuration file (Config-eSpace7910/Config-eSpace7950.xml), signal
tone file and certificate file of the target version for the specific phone model. For
details, see 3.2 Required Data.
l (Optional) DNS server
To use domain names in file URLs, prepare a DNS server. For details about how to
configure a DNS server, see 8.6 Setting Up the AD and DNS Servers.

NOTICE
Ensure that Automatic Deployment (enabled by default) has been enabled for eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950s. For details about how to enable Automatic Deployment, see 7.2 Upgrade.
Context
After being connected to the DHCP server and powered on, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 sends a
request to the DHCP server for an IP address. In response, the DHCP server returns an IP
address, together with the URL of the UPF file (containing the addresses of the configuration
file and the file server) carried in the Option 246 parameter. eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 then
obtains the configuration file from the file server to update its configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the configuration file.
In the configuration file, set related parameters (see Table 4-7 for detailed parameter
descriptions) based on the actual network environment. For details about the other parameters,
see the eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone Configuration File Parameter Description.

Parameter Descri EC6.X UC2.X Asteri CC IMS IMS
ption sk +UC
Phone. Networ Networ 10 0 3 5 6 9

Environ kingEn k
ment vironme environ
nt ment.
Phone.S Primary Address Enter Enter Enter Enter The This

erver RegSer of the the the the the setting paramet
verAddr active addres addres addres addres is er is set
ess registrar s of the s of the s of the s of the automat by the
server. active active active active ically adminis
registr registr registr registr pushed trator.
ar ar ar ar by the
server server server server AA
with with with with server.
which which which which
the the the the
phone phone phone phone
accoun accoun accoun accoun
t is t is t is t is
registe registe registe registe
red. red. red. red.


ption sk +UC
Primary Port Enter Enter Enter Enter The This

RegSer number the the the the setting paramet
verPort of the port port port port is er is set
active numbe numbe numbe numbe automat by the
registrar r of the r of the r of the r of the ically adminis
server. active active active active pushed trator.
registr registr registr registr by the
ar ar ar ar AA
server server server server server.
with with with with
which which which which
the the the the
phone phone phone phone
accoun accoun accoun accoun
t is t is t is t is
registe registe registe registe
red. red. red. red.
Defaul Defaul Defaul Defaul
t: 5060 t: 5060 t: 5060 t: 5060
CallOut Address Option Option Option Option The This

ProxyS of the al. al. al. al. setting paramet
erverAd active is er is set
dress proxy automat by the
server. ically adminis
pushed trator.
by the
AA
server.
CallOut Port Option Option Option Option The This

ProxyS number al. al. al. al. setting paramet
erverPo of the is er is set
rt active automat by the
proxy ically adminis
server. pushed trator.
by the
AA
server.
Primary Address N/A. N/A. N/A. N/A. Enter N/A.

AAServ of the the
erAddre active address
ss AA of the
server. active
AA
server.


ption sk +UC
Primary Port N/A. N/A. N/A. N/A. Enter N/A.

AAServ number the port
erPort of the number
active of the
AA active
server. AA
server.
Primary Address The Enter Enter N/A. The The

EAddrS of the setting the the setting setting
erverAd director is addres addres is is
dress y automa s of the s of the automat automat
server. tically active active ically ically
pushed directo directo pushed pushed
by the ry ry by the by the
uPortal server. server. AA uPortal
server. server. server.
Primary Port N/A. Enter Enter N/A. The N/A.

EAddrS number the the setting
erverPo of the port port is
rt active numbe numbe automat
director r of the r of the ically
y active active pushed
server. directo directo by the
ry ry AA
Defaul Defaul
t: 80 t: 80
ImageS primary Address The N/A. N/A. N/A. The The

erver Addr of the setting setting setting
profile is is is
picture automa automat automat
server. tically ically ically
pushed pushed pushed
by the by the by the
uPortal AA uPortal
primary Port N/A. N/A. N/A. N/A. The N/A.

Port number setting
of the is
profile automat
picture ically
server. pushed
by the
AA
server.


ption sk +UC
Access. URL NTP Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter This

Sntp server the the the the the paramet
address. URL URL URL URL URL or er is set
or IP or IP or IP or IP IP by the
addres addres addres addres address adminis
s in s in s in s in in trator.
dotted dotted dotted dotted dotted
decima decima decima decima decimal
l l l l notation
notatio notatio notatio notatio of the
n of n of n of n of NTP
the the the the server.
NTP NTP NTP NTP
server. server. server. server.
If you only need to deliver part of the configurations in the configuration file, add the MFlag="1" field
to the configuration items to deliver.
Assuming that the original fields in the configuration file are as follows:
<Lang language="zh-CN"/>
<CallOut enableCallout="0"/>
If you want to change language to en-US and no longer deliver the CallOut configuration, change the
configuration file as follows:
<Lang MFlag="1" language="en-US"/>
After the change, only the lang configuration is delivered and the language is changed to English.
Step 2 Place the files to upgrade into the file server's default directory, for example, C:\Program
Files\Apache Software Foundation\Apache2.2\htdocs. The files include the version file,
configuration file, signal tone, certificate files and manufacturer specified configuration file.
Step 3 Prepare a UPF file. For details, see 8.1 Preparing a UPF File.
When you need to upgrade both eSpace 7910 and eSpace 7950, you can use a single UPF file to define
the upgrade file directories for the two models.
Step 4 Set the Option 246 parameter of the DHCP server (configured on the Windows Server 2008)
to the UPF file URL. For details about how to set the Option 246 parameter, see 8.3.4 Setting
Option 246 Parameters.
l The URL specified by the Option 246 parameter prevails, even when different URLs are
set in other parameters.
l The URL for the UPF file must contain the name of the UPF file and must not contain
spaces or Chinese characters.
Table 4-8 lists different settings of the Option 246 parameter.

Table 4-8 Option 246 parameter settings

Value Format Example
IP upfprofile.address=https://HTTP server IP address/UPF file

directory/UPF file name, for example,
upfprofile.address=https://10.166.102.110/directory/
UPF-eSpace7950.xml
IP:port upfprofile.address=https://HTTP server IP address:HTTP

server port number/UPF file directory/UPF file name, for
example, upfprofile.address=https://10.166.102.110:80/
directory/UPF-eSpace7950.xml
Domain name upfprofile.address=https://HTTP server domain name/UPF

file directory/UPF file name, for example,
upfprofile.address=https://default.example.com/
directory/UPF-eSpace7950.xml
Domain name:port upfprofile.address=https://HTTP server domain name:HTTP

server port number/UPF file directory/UPF file name, for
example, upfprofile.address=https://
default.company.com:80/directory/UPF-eSpace7950.xml
Step 5 Power on all eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s to be deployed.

All eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s automatically obtain their IP addresses and download desired
UPF files. According to the upgrade file directory specified in the UPF file, eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950s upgrade their versions and download configuration files for batch
configuration.
----End
Result
Log in to an IP phone using the configured account and dial *125. If you can hear the
announcement telling you the number of this IP phone, the IP phone is successfully
configured. It is recommended that you conduct call tests on some eSpace 7910/eSpace
7950s. Specifically, access the phone web page and check whether the displayed
configuration information is the same as that in the configuration file. If the configuration
information is different, the configurations of some eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s fail. The
possible cause is that the server cannot handle all the requests sent simultaneously from
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s. In this case, restart eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s that encounter the
configuration failure and configure them again.
4.3.2 Number Provisioning

This section describes how to provision numbers using DHCP Option 246.
Prerequisites
l HTTP file server
For details about how to configure an HTTP file server, see 8.5 Setting Up an HTTP
Server.

l DHCP server
– You can use a switch to function as a DHCP server.
– You can also configure a DHCP server on the Window Server 2008 or Windows
Server 2012. For details, see 8.3.1 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the
Windows Server 2008 or 8.3.2 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the
Windows Server 2012.
This section uses how to configure a DHCP server on the Windows Server 2008 as
an example.
l (Optional) DNS server
To use domain names in file URLs, prepare a DNS server. For details about how to
configure a DNS server, see 8.6 Setting Up the AD and DNS Servers.
l You have obtained the MAC addresses, SIP accounts, and passwords for the IP phones to
have numbers provisioned, and prepared a mapping worksheet of such information.
l You have obtained the universal configuration files of the IP phones.
NOTICE
Ensure that Automatic Deployment (enabled by default) has been enabled for eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950s. For details about how to enable Automatic Deployment, see 7.2 Upgrade.
Context
After being powered on, the IP phone obtains the file server address through the Option 246
cfg.address field, combines the file server address with the IP phone's MAC address to obtain
the configuration file address, and downloads the corresponding configuration file from the
server to update its configuration. In this way, number provisioning is completed.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the configuration file.
Set parameters by referring to Table 4-9 according to the network environment. For other
parameters that are not listed in Table 4-9, see the eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone
Configuration File Parameter Description.
Parameter Descript EC6.X UC2.X CC IMS IMS

ion +UC
UIEMUs UserNO SIP Enter Enter Enter Enter the Enter the
er account. the the the account. account.
account account account
. . .


ion +UC
UserNam User Enter Enter Enter Enter the Enter the

e name. the user the user the user user user
name name name name name
corresp corresp corresp correspo correspon
onding onding onding nding to ding to
to the to the to the the the
number. number. number. number. number.
PassWord SIP Enter Enter Enter Enter the Enter the

password. the SIP the SIP the SIP SIP SIP
passwo passwo passwo passwor password.
rd. rd. rd. d.
isLogOut Flag of 0 0 0 0 0
automatic
login
upon a
phone
restart.
isStorePa Indicates 1 1 1 1 1
sswd whether
to
remembe
r the
password.
Phone.En Networki Network 10 0 5 6 9

vironmen ngEnviro environm
t nment ent.
Phone.Se PrimaryR Address Enter Enter Enter The Enter the

rver egServer of the the the the setting is address
Address active address address address automati of the
registrar of the of the of the cally active
server. active active active pushed registrar
registra registra registra by the server
r server r server r server AA with
with with with server. which the
which which which phone
the the the account is
phone phone phone registered
account account account .
is is is
register register register
ed. ed. ed.


ion +UC
PrimaryR Port Enter Enter Enter The Enter the

egServer number the port the port the port setting is port
Port of the number number number automati number
active of the of the of the cally of the
registrar active active active pushed active
server. registra registra registra by the registrar
r server r server r server AA server
with with with server. with
which which which which the
the the the phone
phone phone phone account is
account account account registered
is is is .
register register register Default:
ed. ed. ed. 5060
Default Default Default
: 5060 : 5060 : 5060
CallOutP Address Optiona Optiona Optiona The Optional.

roxyServ of the l. l. l. setting is
erAddres active automati
s proxy cally
server. pushed
by the
AA
server.
CallOutP Port Optiona Optiona Optiona The Optional.

roxyServ number l. l. l. setting is
erPort of the automati
active cally
proxy pushed
server. by the
AA
server.
PrimaryA Address N/A. N/A. N/A. Enter the N/A.

AServer of the port
Address active number
AA of the
server. active
AA
server.


ion +UC
PrimaryA Port N/A. N/A. N/A. Enter the N/A.

AServerP number port
ort of the number
active of the
AA active
server. AA
server.
PrimaryE Address The Enter N/A. The The

AddrServ of the setting the setting is setting is
erAddres directory is address automati automatic
s server. automat of the cally ally
ically active pushed pushed
pushed director by the by the
by the y AA uPortal
uPortal server. server. server.
server.
PrimaryE Port N/A. Enter N/A. The N/A.

AddrServ number the port setting is
erPort of the number automati
active of the cally
directory active pushed
server. director by the
y AA
server. server.
Default
: 80
ImageSer primaryA Address The N/A. N/A. The The

ver ddr of the setting setting is setting is
profile is automati automatic
picture automat cally ally
server. ically pushed pushed
pushed by the by the
by the AA uPortal
uPortal server. server.
server.
primaryP Port N/A. N/A. N/A. The N/A.

ort number setting is
of the automati
profile cally
picture pushed
server. by the
AA
server.


ion +UC
Access.S URL NTP Enter Enter Enter Enter the Enter the
ntp server the the the URL or URL or
address. URL or URL or URL or IP IP
IP IP IP address address in
address address address in dotted dotted
in in in decimal decimal
dotted dotted dotted notation notation
decimal decimal decimal of the of the
notatio notatio notatio NTP NTP
n of the n of the n of the server. server.
NTP NTP NTP
Step 2 Name each configuration file after the MAC address (uppercase) of the corresponding IP
phone, for example, E468A3590777, and place the configuration files to the default directory
(C:\Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Apache2.2\htdocs as an example) of the
file server.
Step 3 Set the Option 246 parameter of the DHCP server (deployed on the Windows Server 2008) to
the file server address, in format of cfg.address=https://server IP/folder name, for example,
cfg.address=https://10.166.102.110/directory/.
Step 4 Power on all IP phones.
----End
Result
The IP phone combines the obtained file server address with its MAC address to obtain the
configuration file address, for example, cfg.address=https://10.166.102.110/directory/
E468A3590777.xml. Then, the IP phone obtains the configuration file from this address. The
configuration file takes effect after the phone restart.
4.4 Using Web

This section describes how to configure a single eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 on the phone web
page.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the IP address of the phone to configure and the SIP server IP address. For
details, see 3.2 Required Data.
Context
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 can connect to a network through the web page, and this web-based
network access applies to the configuration of a single eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950. This section
uses eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 in an EC6.X server network as an example to describe how to
set the server parameters for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 on the web page.

For details about how to set the service parameters, see 5 Service Configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950. For details, see 3.3.4 Configuring
the Phone IP Address.
Step 2 Access the phone web page. The default user name is admin and the default password is
admin123.
Change your user name and password at your first login to ensure security. Ensure that the password
meets complexity requirements.
Step 3 Choose Advanced > Server.

The Server page is displayed.
Step 4 Set server parameters (see Figure 4-51 for detailed parameter descriptions).

Figure 4-51 Setting server parameters
Step 5 Click Save.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Power on eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 and log in using the registered account. All the basic call
functions of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 will be available at this point.

4.5 Using LCD

This section describes how to configure a single eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 on the phone LCD
screen.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the SIP server IP address. For details, see 3.2 Required Data.
Context
This section uses eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 in EC6.X network as an example to describe how
to set the server parameters for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 on the LCD screen.
For details about how to set the service parameters, see 5 Service Configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 On the phone login screen, press the Network softkey and use navigation buttons to access
the Server screen.
The Server screen is displayed.
Step 2 Set server parameters (see Table 4-10 for detailed parameter descriptions).

Parameter How to Set
Network Environment EC6.X

NOTE
A phone restart is required to make the modified
network environment take effect.
uPortal Server Enter the IP address of the uPortal server.
Port Enter the port number of the uPortal server.
Step 3 Press the Done softkey.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Power on eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 and log in using the registered account. All the basic call
functions of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 will be available at this point.

Administrator Guide 5 Service Configuration
5 Service Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure basic services and UC services for eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950.
You can configure the services either on the web page or LCD screen of eSpace 7910/eSpace
7950. In this chapter, web-aided configuration is used as an example. For details about how to
use the services, see the User Guide of eSpace 7910 or eSpace 7950.
5.1 Distinctive Ring

This section describes how to configure the distinctive ring service.
Prerequisites
The distinctive ring service rights have been assigned.
Configuration Methods
You can configure the distinctive ring service using four different methods, as listed in Table
5-1.
Table 5-1 Configuration methods

Method Details
eSight On the eSight management portal, choose

Business > Collaboration > IP Phone
Management > Deployment Management
> Configuration file Management. On the
System tab page, set related parameters in
the Ringtone Parameter Settings area.
DHCP Option 246 Set related parameters in the configuration

file and deliver the new configuration file to
the IP phone.

Method Details
TMS Log in to the TMS and click the

Subscriber/Device Operation tab. In the
pane on the left of the window, click Data
Model Tree. Deliver the configuration
using the data model tree. Alternatively,
upload the script to set related parameters.
Web On the phone web page, choose

Preferences > Ringtone. Choose Ringtone
Parameter Settings and set related
parameters.
Parameter Settings
Table 5-2 describes the distinctive ring parameters and how to set them.
RingFiledX indicates the X-th ringtone parameter, and the value of X ranges from 1 to 10.
Parameter Description How to Set How to Modify

the Configuration
File
DefaultRing Default ring tone. Value: 0–255 bytes Location: Device >
UserCfg > Ring
Example:
DefaultRing="Beep.
wav"
InNetRing Ring tone for Value: 0–255 bytes Location: Device >
intranet calls. UserCfg > Ring
Example:
InNetRing="Beep.w
av"
OutNetRing Ring tone for Value: 0–255 bytes Location: Device >
extranet calls. UserCfg > Ring
Example:
OutNetRing="Beep.
wav"
HuntGroupRing Ring tone for calls Value: 0–255 bytes Location: Device >
destined for hunt UserCfg > Ring
groups. Example:
HuntGroupRing="B
eep.wav"


the Configuration
File
WakeUpRing Ring tone for Value: 0–255 bytes Location: Device >
reminder calls. UserCfg > Ring
Example:
WakeUpRing="Bee
p.wav"
RingFiledX Ringtone header Value: a string of Location: Device >

field. 0–255 bytes ComCfg >
The value of this DistinctRing
parameter must be NOTE
the same as that of The value of
Parameter can
the corresponding
contain letters, digits,
ring header field on and underscores (_)
the server. only.
Example:
RingFiled1="pattern
3"
RingnameX Ringtone name. Value: a string of Location: Device >

0–255 bytes ComCfg >
Set this parameter as DistinctRing
required. Example:
Ringname1="Beep.
wav"
5.2 Multi-Line Support

This section describes how to configure phone accounts and lines to place calls in the multi-
line service.
Prerequisites
l You have obtained multiple SIP accounts from the SIP server administrator.
l You have obtained and configured the SIP server address for the IP phone.
Context
eSpace 7910 IP Phone supports a maximum of three accounts and 12 concurrent calls, and
eSpace 7950 IP Phone supports a maximum of six accounts and 12 concurrent calls. Each line
button can be bound to a maximum of 12 calls and support private line, shared line, and
intercom functions.
You can configure the multi-line service using four different methods, as listed in Table 5-3.


Method Details
eSight On the eSight management portal, choose Business >

Collaboration > IP Phone Management > Deployment
Management > Configuration file Management, set
related parameters on the page that is displayed.
NOTE
This batch configuration method is not recommended for the multi-
line service.
DHCP Option 246 Set related parameters in the configuration file and deliver
the new configuration file to the IP phone.
NOTE
This batch configuration method is not recommended for the multi-
line service.
TMS Log in to the TMS and click the Subscriber/Device

Operation tab. In the pane on the left of the window, click
Data Model Tree. Deliver the configuration using the data
model tree. Alternatively, upload the script to set related
parameters.
Web On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Accounts and
set related parameters on the page that is displayed.
LCD On the phone LCD screen, choose Apps > Advanced >
Accounts and set related parameters on the screen that is
displayed.
Parameter Settings
Table 5-4 lists the parameters that you must set for the multi-line service.
l If the SIP server address, SIP server port, proxy server address, and proxy server port are specified
in both Account Setting and Server, the settings in Account Setting prevails.
l If the preceding parameters are set only in Account Setting, these settings are used. If the preceding
parameters are set only in Server, these settings are used.


Parameter Description How to Set How to
Modify the
Configuration
File
Account Setting Account Indicates the ID Ask the SIP Parameter:

NOTE used for an server Account
If the SIP server account to administrator Location:
address, SIP register with the for an account Device >
server port SIP server. The or directly log
number, proxy UserCfg >
SIP server uses in to the SIP Account1
server address,
and proxy this ID to server to
NOTE
server port identify the configure an Account1
number are account. When account as the indicates the
specified, the you dial a long administrator. first account,
account uses number Account2
NOTE
these addresses, indicates the
(country code The phone's
free of second account,
restrictions by +area code first account can
be edited but and so on.
phone settings. +short number),
cannot be Example:
the short
deleted. Account="4700
number is
displayed on 2"
the dialing
screen. When
you place a call
using a short
number, the IP
phone obtains
the country
code and area
code of this
short number
from the AA
server to route
the call and
query the
directory.
NOTE
eSpace 7910
supports a
maximum of
three accounts,
while eSpace
7950 supports a
maximum of
six.


Modify the
Configuration
File
User Name Indicates the l In a UC2.X, Parameter:

user name, EC6.X, IMS UserName
which is or third- Location:
provided by the party Device >
Voice over IP network UserCfg >
(VoIP) service environment Account1 >
provider. , set this Auth
parameter
based on Example:
requirement UserName="47
s. 002@example.c
om "
l In an IMS
+UC
network
environment
, set this
parameter to
the value (in
format of
Account@D
omain
name)
specified on
the SIP
server.
Password Indicates the Ask the SIP Parameter:

password used server Passwd
to register an administrator Location:
account with for a password Device >
the SIP server. or directly log UserCfg >
in to the SIP Account1 >
server to Auth
configure a
password as the Example:
administrator. Passwd="admin
123456"


Modify the
Configuration
File
Label Name Indicates the The value is Parameter:

name of an automatically LabelName
account pushed by the Location:
displayed on a AA server. Device >
line button of UserCfg >
the IP phone. Account1
NOTE
Example:
After you set
the label name, LabelName="4
the IP phone 7002"
automatically
synchronizes it
to the server. If
Displayname is
enabled on the
server, the label
name will be
displayed on the
incoming call
notification
screen of the
called party's
phone if a call is
placed using
this account.
Registration Indicates the No -

Status registration configuration is
status of an required.
account.


Modify the
Configuration
File
SIP Server Specifies the Enter the IP Parameters:

phone address of the PrimaryRegSe
registration SIP server rverAddress,
mode and the based on your BackupRegSer
SIP server network verAddress,
address. environment. and
NOTE l In an EC6.X LocalRegServe
Server 1, network rAddress
Server 2,
environment Location:
Server 3,
Server 4, and , the SIP Device >
Server 5 server is the ComCfg >
represent the CloudUSM Phone >
active SIP server. Enter Server
server, standby the domain
SIP server, Setting:
name of the
standby SIP
CloudUSM l PrimaryRe
server 2,
standby SIP server as the gServerAdd
server 3, and server ress: Set this
local SIP server address. parameter to
respectively. the address
l In a UC2.X
When the server of the active
network
switches to SIP server.
Server3, environment
Server 4 or , the SIP l BackupReg
server is a ServerAddr
Server 5, gateway of ess: Set this
is displayed in the eSpace parameter to
the status bar of
U1900 the address
the phone.
series or of the
EGW1500 standby SIP
series. server.
l In an IMS l BackupReg
+UC Server2Add
network ress: Set this
environment parameter to
, the SIP the address
server is a of standby
gateway of SIP server 2.
the eSpace
l BackupReg
U2900
Server3Add
series. The
ress: Set this
SIP server
parameter to
setting is
the address
automaticall
of standby
y pushed by
SIP server 3.
the AA
server. l LocalRegSe
rverAddres


Modify the
Configuration
File
l In an IMS s: Set this

network, parameter to
this the address
parameter is of the local
set by the SIP server.
administrato Example:
r. PrimaryRegSer
l In a CC verAddress="19
network 2.168.1.9"
environment
, the SIP
server is a
gateway of
the eSpace
U2900
series, a
UAP3300,
or a Session
Border
Controller
(SBC).
l In a third-
party SIP
server
network
environment
, the SIP
server is a
third-party
SIP server.


Modify the
Configuration
File
SIP Server Port Indicates the Enter the port Parameters:

port number of number of the PrimaryRegSe
the SIP server. SIP server rverPort,
based on your BackupRegSer
network verPort, and
environment. LocalRegServe
l In an IMS rPort
+UC Location:
network Device >
environment ComCfg >
, you do not Phone >
need to Server
specify the
Setting:
port number.
The value is l PrimaryRe
automaticall gServerPor
y pushed by t: Set this
the AA parameter to
server. the port
number of
l In an IMS
the active
network,
SIP server.
this
parameter is l BackupReg
set by the ServerPort:
administrato Set this
r. parameter to
the port
l In a UC2.X,
number of
EC6.X, or
the standby
CC network
SIP server.
environment
, use the l BackupReg
default Server2Por
value 5060. t: Set this
However, if parameter to
TLS is used the port
for SIP number of
signaling standby SIP
transmission server 2.
, set the port l BackupReg
number of Server3Por
the SIP t: Set this
server to parameter to
5061. the port
l In a third- number of
party SIP standby SIP
network server 3.


Modify the
Configuration
File
environment l LocalRegSe
, set this rverPort:
parameter to Set this
the port parameter to
number of the port
the third- number of
party SIP the local SIP
server in server.
use. Example:
PrimaryRegSer
verPort="5060"


Modify the
Configuration
File
Proxy Server Indicates the In an EC6.X Parameters:

address of the network CallOutProxy
proxy server. environment, ServerAddress
The IP phone enter the ,
registers with signaling IP CallOutBacku
the proxy server address of the pServerAddres
with preference. CloudUSM. s, and
If the proxy In an IMS+UC CallOutLocalS
server address network erverAddress
you have environment, Location:
specified is the value is Device >
incorrect, the IP automatically ComCfg >
phone will pushed by the Phone >
continue its AA server. Server
attempt to In an IMS Setting:
register with network, this
this incorrect l CallOutPro
parameter is set xyServerAd
address and by the
does not dress: Set
administrator. this
register with the
SIP server. This parameter to
will cause a the address
registration of the active
failure. proxy
server.
When the
server switches l CallOutBac
to Server 4 or kupServer
Address:
Server 5, Set this
is displayed in parameter to
the status bar of the address
the phone. of the
standby
proxy
server.
l CallOutPro
xyServer2A
ddress: Set
this
parameter to
the address
of standby
proxy server
2.
l CallOutPro
xyServer3A


Modify the
Configuration
File
ddress: Set
this
parameter to
the address
of standby
proxy server
3.
l CallOutLoc
alServerAd
dress: Set
this
parameter to
the address
of the local
proxy
server.
Example:
CallOutProxyS
erverAddress="
192.168.1.10"


Modify the
Configuration
File
Proxy Server Indicates the In an IMS+UC Parameters:

Port port number of network CallOutProxy
the proxy environment, ServerPort,
server. the value is CallOutBacku
automatically pServerPort,
pushed by the and
AA server. CallOutLocalS
In an IMS erverPort
network, this Location:
parameter is set Device >
by the ComCfg >
administrator. Phone >
Server
Setting:
l CallOutPro
xyServerPo
rt: Set this
parameter to
the port
number of
the active
proxy
server.
l CallOutBac
kupServerP
ort: Set this
parameter to
the port
number of
the standby
proxy
server.
l CallOutPro
xyServer2P
ort: Set this
parameter to
the port
number of
standby
proxy server
2.
l CallOutPro
xyServer3P
ort: Set this
parameter to


Modify the
Configuration
File
the port
number of
standby
proxy server
3.
l CallOutLoc
alServerPor
t: Set this
parameter to
the port
number of
the local
proxy
server.
Example:
CallOutProxyS
erverPort="506
0"


Modify the
Configuration
File
SIP Transport Indicates the Set this Parameters:

SIP parameter based TransferMode
transmission on Location:
mode. Three requirements. Device >
options are l If SIP ComCfg >
available: UDP, Transport Phone >
TLS, and TCP. is set to Server
UDP: short for Default, the Setting:
User Datagram account uses
Protocol. This the phone's l 2: TCP
SIP SIP l 1: TLS
transmission transmission l 0: UDP
mode applies to mode.
networks with Example:
l If SIP TransferMode=
insufficient Transport
bandwidth. "0"
is set to
TCP: short for UDP, TCP,
Transmission or TLS, the
Control account uses
Protocol. This its own
SIP transmission
transmission mode, free
mode ensures of
the accuracy of restrictions
signaling by phone
transmission. It settings.
is NOTE
recommended When a phone
when the connects to the
network Huawei public
conditions are cloud,
connections
good. using SIP-TLS
TLS: short for are not
Transport Layer supported.
Security. This
SIP
transmission
mode ensures
the security of
signaling
transmission.


Modify the
Configuration
File
Line Match Line Indicates a You can adjust Parameter:

NOTE phone line. the number of LineKey
In an IMS+UC Each account lines supported Location:
network can support according to Device >
environment, multiple lines. your needs.
you do not need UserCfg
Only one line NOTE
to specify the NOTE
line parameters. can be active at eSpace 7910 LineKey1
The AA server any time; other supports a indicates the
automatically lines are maximum of 6 first account,
lines, while
pushes the line automatically LineKey2
parameter eSpace 7950 indicates the
placed on hold. supports a
settings to the second account,
IP phone. maximum of 12 and so on.
lines.
Account Indicates a By default, each Parameter:

phone account. account is ExtDataOne
l The IP assigned two Location:
phone lines. You can
assign more Device >
initiates a UserCfg
registration lines for an
with the SIP account based Example:
server only on ExtDataOne="4
when the requirements. 7002"
account in NOTE
use matches An account can
have call
the line.
transfer, local
l Each eSpace conference, and
7910 other services
account can during in-
progress calls
be assigned
only when that
a maximum account has
of six lines, been assigned at
and each least two lines.
eSpace 7950
account a
maximum of
12 lines.


Modify the
Configuration
File
Feature Selects the Set this Parameter:

Selection functions parameter based BtnType
available for an on Location:
account. Four requirements. Device >
options are UserCfg
available:
Private, Value: 13, 14,
Shared, 15, 23
Intercom, l 13: Private
Centrex Num l 14: Shared
and CC.
l 15: Intercom
l Private: a
common l 23: CC
line for Example:
basic call BtnType="13"
services
l Shared: a
shared line
l Intercom: a
line for
intercom
calls.
l Centrex
Num: a line
for calls
using the
Centrex
number
(group short
number).
This option
is available
in the IMS
+UC
environment
. Centrex
numbers are
configured
on the server
and replace
user
numbers for
the call
services.
l CC: a CC
line.


Modify the
Configuration
File
Peer Numbers Indicates the Enter a number Parameter:

peer number of according to the ActionData
the function Location:
corresponding selected. Device >
function. When Feature UserCfg
Selection is set This parameter
to Private, can be set only
Peer Numbers when BtnType
does not take is set to 13 or
effect. 14
Example:
ActionData="4
7002"
Label Name Indicates the Specify a name Parameter:

line name you prefer. LableName
displayed on a Location:
line button. Device >
UserCfg
Value: 0–127
bytes
Example:
LableName="Fr
eedom"
Calls Indicates the Set this Parameter:

number of calls parameter to a CallNum
for each line value ranging Location:
button. from 1 to 12. Device >
NOTE UserCfg
The CC line
supports only Setting: Set this
one call. parameter to a
value ranging
from 1 to 12.
Default: 1
Example:
CallNum="1"
Follow-up Procedure
View the registration status of the IP phone on the Advanced > Accounts page.
If Registered is displayed for an account, the account is registered.

5.3 Dialing Rules

This section describes how to configure dialing rules.
If the number a user dialed matches a preset dialing rule, the phone automatically converts the
number according to that rule and calls the converted number after the preset delay time
expires.
l The dialing rules take effect on the operations of manually dialing numbers and making calls from
the directory or call history.
l The total dialing rules created on the IP phone cannot exceed 1024 bytes.
You can configure dialing rules using three different methods, as listed in Table 5-5.

Method Details

Management > Configuration file Management. Click the
Call Settings tab, set related parameters on the page that is
displayed.
DHCP Option 246 Set related parameters in the configuration file and deliver the
new configuration file to the IP phone.
TMS Log in to the TMS and click the Subscriber/Device Operation

tab. In the pane on the left of the window, click Data Model
Tree. Deliver the configuration using the data model tree.
Alternatively, use the TR-069 script to set related parameters.
Web On the phone web page, choose Call Settings > Dialing Rules
and set related parameters on the page that is displayed.
LCD N/A
Parameter Settings
Table 5-6 lists the dialing rule parameters that you must set.


the Configuration
File
Dialing Rules Specifies the rule Configure a dialing Parameter:

according to which rule according to the Totalrules
the IP phone description provided Location: Device >
converts the in Table 5-8. ComCfg >
matched number and DigitMapRule
automatically dials
the converted Setting: If multiple
number. dialing rules are
required, separate
them using vertical
bars (|).
Example:
Totalrules="XXXX
X|
<0:0086>XXXXXX
XXXXX>"
Delay Indicates the time Set this parameter Parameter:

that elapses before depending on your delayTime
the IP phone needs. Location: Device >
automatically calls Value range: 0-15, in ComCfg >
the converted the unit of seconds DigitMapRule
number.
Default: 0
Table3 Parameters delivered by the DMS describes the dialing rule parameters that can be
delivered by the DMS.
Table 5-7 Parameters delivered by the DMS

Paramete Description Location TAG Value
r
Totalrules Total rules, Device > HW_TIPT_Dial Value: 0 to 1024

consisting of ComCfg > Plan bytes
immediate call rules DigitMapRule
and number change
rules.
All rules separated
by vertical bars (|)
are stored as the
total rules.
delayTime - Device > HW_TIPT_Dial Value: 0 to 512

ComCfg > Plan_DelayTim bytes
DigitMapRule e

Table 5-8 Symbols in dialing rules

Symbol Description Example
x or X Represents a digit of 0-9. 135xxxxxxxx: indicates an

11-digit number starting
with 135.
[] Matches any digit in []. l [2-8]: indicates any digit

of 2-8.
l [279]: indicates any digit
of 2, 7, and 9.
. Indicates that the digit 92.3: indicates 93, 923,

before the dot separator (.) 9223, and so on.
can be repeated any number
of times or not at all.
NOTE
The last digit of a dialing rule
cannot be a dot (.).
<:> Specifies a dialing rule as l 1[278]<111:000>XX:

follows: specifies that the phone
If the dialing rule is automatically replaces
A<B:C>D, 111 with 000 if the
number a user dials
l When the number a user matches 1[278]111XX.
dials matches ABD, the For example, if the
phone automatically number a user dials is
replaces B with C and 1211123, the phone
calls ACD. automatically calls
l A, B, C, and D in the 1200023.
dialing rule indicate l <:0086>XXXXX:
character strings that specifies that the phone
consist of digits and automatically prefixes
common signs, such as 0086 to the number a
asterisks (*), number user dials if the number
signs (#), and plus signs contains five digits.
(+). If the number a user dials
l A, B, and D can also is 12345, the phone
contain dialing rule automatically calls
symbols. 008612345.
Configuration Example
Configure dialing rules depending on your needs. The following examples describe the
specific functions available to users after dialing rules are configured:
l Immediate call
For example, a user wants the phone to automatically call a 5-digit number immediately
after the user dials such a number. To achieve this, set Dialing Rules to XXXXX and
Delay to 0.

l Delay call
For example, a user wants the phone to automatically call a mobile phone number
starting with 135, 136, 137, 138, or, 139 5s after the user dials such a number. To achieve
this, set Dialing Rules to 13[5-9]XXXXXXXX and Delay to 5.
l Number replacement
For example, a user wants the phone to automatically replace 0 with 0086 and call the
number after the user dials a mobile phone number starting with 0. To achieve this, set
Dialing Rules to <0:0086> XXXXXXXXXXX.
l Number insertion
For example, a user wants the phone to automatically suffix # to a 3-digit number
starting with * and call the number after the user dials such a number. To achieve this, set
Dialing Rules to *XX<:#>.
For example, a user wants the phone to automatically prefix 9 to a 7–digit number that
the user dials. To achieve so, set Dialing Rules to <:9>XXXXXXX.
5.4 Emergency Call

This section describes how to configure the emergency call service. The IP phone allows
users to make emergency calls even if it is locked or unregistered.
Context
The administrator configures the physical location information on the BMP(IMS+UC) or
CloudUSM(EC6.X). Terminals report their current locations to the server when they are
logged in. The location information helps the emergency contact center to locate the terminals
when emergency calls are made. This is called the LBS.
NOTICE
The location information is configured by the administrator on the BMP(IMS+UC) or

CloudUSM(EC6.X), and it is not automatically collected by certain programs on the
terminals. In addition, the location information indicates physical locations within the
enterprise and does not belong to personal privacy. When configuring the location
information, the administrator needs to comply with local laws and regulations.
Prerequisites
l The emergency call service has been configured on the SIP server.
For details about how to configure the emergency call service on a SIP server, see the
product documentation of the gateway that serves as the SIP server.
l You have obtained and configured the SIP server address for the IP phone.
You can configure the emergency call service using three different methods, as listed in Table
5-9.


Method Details
eSight On the eSight management portal, choose Resource >

Management > Configuration file Management. Select the
corresponding configuration file, click , and expand the
configuration items. Click the Call Settings tab and set
Emergency Call on the page that is displayed.
Web After an emergency number is added in the configuration file,

choose Call Settings > Emergency Call on the phone web page.
LCD N/A
Parameter Settings
Table 5-10 lists the parameters that you must set for the emergency call service.

the Configuration
File
Call Source Indicates the user or N/A Parameter:

incoming trunk that Accessdomain
initiates a call. Two types Location: Device >
of call sources are ComCfg > Phone >
available: intra-office call Global
source and incoming call
NOTE
source. Generally, users or Set this parameter to
incoming trunks that have be the same as the
the same calling attributes call source
belong to the same call configured on the
source. switch.
Example:
Accessdomain="0"


the Configuration
File
Emergency Indicates an emergency N/A Parameter:

Number number. The IP phone can Emergencynumber
call the preset emergency 1
numbers even if it is Location: Device >
locked or unregistered. ComCfg > Phone >
The emergency numbers Global
need to be configured in
the configuration file. Example:
After the configuration Emergencynumber1
file with emergency ="110"
numbers configured is
imported to the IP phone,
the emergency number
page displays the
configured emergency
numbers. Users can select
the emergency numbers to
use based on
requirements.
NOTE
A maximum of eight
emergency numbers are
supported.
Whether to Enables or disables an A configured Parameter:

enable an emergency number that emergency Number1Enable
emergency has been configured in the number is NOTE
number configuration file. selected (enabled) Number1 indicates
by default. If you emergency number 1,
do not want to Number2 indicates
emergency number 2,
use an emergency
and so on.
number, deselect
this number. Location: Device >
ComCfg > Phone >
Global
Value: 0 or 1
l 1: enable
l 0: disable
Default: 1
Example:
Number1Enable="1
"


the Configuration
File
Switch MAC Indicates the MAC N/A Parameter:

Address address of the switch. ChassisID
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Phone >
Global
Example:
ChassisID="4"
Port Indicates the port number N/A Parameter: PortID

of the switch. Location: Device >
ComCfg > Phone >
Global
Example:
PortID="60"
Follow-up Procedure
Access the phone web page as an administrator and choose Call Settings > Emergency Call
to view the emergency numbers that you have configured.
All the configured emergency numbers are selected by default. If you do not need to use an emergency
number, deselect it.
5.5 XML App

This section describes how to enable the XML service and modify an XML file.
Prerequisites
l You have configured the HTTP/HTTPS server. The following uses an Apache HTTP
server as an example. For details about how to configure an Apache HTTP server, see
8.5 Setting Up an HTTP Server.
l You have placed the files that eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 needs to access into the default
path of the Apache HTTP server. The following uses C:\Program Files\Apache
Software Foundation\Apache2.2\htdocs as an example.
– If the required files are placed directly in the root directory (namely, htdocs folder
in this example), enter the address in format of https://IP address of the PC where
the Apache HTTP server is installed/XML file name to access the Apache HTTP
server, for example, https://192.168.1.222/menu.xml.
– If the required files are placed in a subfolder of the htdocs folder, enter the address
in format of https://IP address of the PC where the Apache HTTP server is
installed/Subfolder/XML file name to access the Apache HTTP server, for example,
https://192.168.1.222/filename/menu.xml.

Context
The XML App service is to parse and display XML files downloaded from an HTTP/HTTPS
server, on the user interface (UI) of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
You can configure the XML App service using four different methods, as listed in Table 5-11.

Method Details

> Configuration file Management. Click
the Others tab and set related parameters on
the page that is displayed.

the IP phone.
Web On the phone web page, choose Advanced

> Others. On the page that is displayed, set
related parameters in the Third-Party
Application Management area.
LCD On the phone LCD screen, choose Apps >

Advanced > XML App and set related
parameters on the screen that is displayed.
Parameter Settings
Table 5-12 lists the XML App parameters that you must set.


the Configuration
File
XML App Indicates whether to Set XML App to Parameter:

enable XML App. Enable. enableAPP
Default: Disable Location: Device >
ComCfg > xmlAPP
Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disables XML
App.
l 1: enables XML
App.
Setting: Set
enableAPP to 1.
Default: 0
Example:
enableAPP="1"


the Configuration
File
Address Indicates the Set this parameter Parameter:

directory of an XML depending on your xmlServerAdd
file on the HTTP/ needs. Using the Location: Device >
HTTPS server. Apache HTTP ComCfg > xmlAPP
server as an
example: Example:
xmlServerAddr="htt
l If the XML file ps://192.168.1.222/
is placed in the menu.xml"
root directory (C:
\Program Files
\Apache
Software
Foundation
\Apache2.2\htdo
cs), set this
parameter to
https://IP address
of the PC where
the Apache
HTTP server is
installed/XML
file name, for
example, https://
192.168.1.222/
menu.xml.
l If the XML file
is placed in a
subfolder of the
root directory (C:
\Program Files
\Apache
Software
Foundation
\Apache2.2\htdo
cs), set this
parameter to
https://IP address
of the PC where
the Apache
HTTP server is
installed/
Subfolder/XML
file name, for
example, https://
192.168.1.222/
filename/
menu.xml.


the Configuration
File
NOTE
If a programmable
button has been
configured as a
shortcut button for
accessing the
directory of an XML
file, you can directly
press that
programmable button
to use the XML
service.
Label Name Indicates the name Specify a name that Parameter:

to be displayed you prefer. labelName
under the XML App Location: Device >
icon on the Apps ComCfg > xmlAPP
screen.
Example:
labelName="APP"
Configuration Example
You can edit XML files by referring to the following example.
This example describes the menu.xml file. (The menu.xml file is generally the first XML file
that we access.)
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<xml>
<title>Service</title>
<body style="menu">
<item>
<text>Weather Forecast</text>
<number>89046</number>
<url>https://192.168.1.222/weather.xml</url>
</item>
<item>
<text>Advertisement</text>
<url>https://192.168.1.222/ad.xml</url>
</item>
<item>
<text>News</text>
<url>https://192.168.1.222/news.xml</url>
</item>
<item>
<text>Contacts</text>
<url>https://192.168.1.222/contact.xml</url>
</item>
</body>
<softkeys>
<item>
<text>Select</text>
<action>Select</action>
</item>

<item>
<text>Back</text>
<action>Back</action>
</item>
<item>
<text>Call</text>
<action>Call</action>
</item>
<item>
<text>Edit Call</text>
<action>Editcall</action>
</item>
<item>
<text>Exit</text>
<action>Exit</action>
</item>
</softkeys>
</xml>
Contents in bold can be user-defined.

In <body style="menu">, menu indicates that an XML file is displayed in the form of a menu
on eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
Figure 5-1 XML file interface in menu mode
In <body style="menu">, menu can be changed to text, which indicates the text form on
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.

Figure 5-2 XML file interface in text mode
l Weather Forecast is the name for an XML file displayed on eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
This name is configurable.
l 89046 is the SIP number for the XML file. This number is not displayed on eSpace
7910/eSpace 7950.
l https://192.168.1.222/weather.xml is the path for the XML file on the Apache HTTP
server. This path is configurable.
By default, XML files are placed under the htdocs folder of the Apache HTTP server.
The following uses the weather.xml file as an example.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<xml>
<title>Weather Forecast</title>
<body style="text">
<item>
<picture x="30" y="30" width="100" height="120"src="https://192.168.5.203/
weather.png">
</picture>
<text x="150" y="50" width="120" height="120">Sunny 2012/7/28</text>
</item>
<item>
<picture x="30" y="30" width="100" height="120"
src="https://192.168.5.203/weather1.png">
</picture>
<text x="150" y="50" width="120" height="120">Cloudy 2012/7/29</text>
</item>
<item>
src="https://192.168.5.203/weather.png">
</picture>
<text x="150" y="50" width="120" height="120">Overcast 2012/7/30</text>
</item>
<item>
src="https://192.168.5.203/weather.png">

</picture>
<text x="150" y="50" width="120" height="120">Sunny to overcast 2012/7/31</text>
</item>
<item>
src="https://192.168.5.203/weather1.png">
</picture>
<text x="150" y="50" width="120" height="120">Rainy 2012/8/1</text>
</item>
</body>
<softkeys>
<item>
<text>Previous page</text>
<action>Previous</action>
</item>
<item>
<text>Next page</text>
<action>Next</action>
</item>
<item>
<text>Back</text>
<action>Back</action>
</item>
<item>
<text>Exit</text>
<action>Exit</action>
</item>
</softkeys>
</xml>
Use Weather Forecast as an example.
l Weather Forecast must be the same as that in the above-mentioned menu.xml file.
l x and y are two coordinates for picture and text display.
l width and height correspond to the width and height for picture and text display.
l https://192.168.5.203/weather.png is the path for the picture file on the Apache HTTP
server.
By default, the picture file is placed under the htdocs folder of the Apache HTTP server.
l Sunny 2012/7/28 is the text information displayed on the IP phone.
Follow-up Procedure
For details, see the eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone XML Application Secondary
Development Guide.
5.6 Multi-Certificate Support

This section describes how to apply for, import, and view certificates.
Context
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 can apply for certificates from the certificate server in either
Proprietary Protocol or SCEP mode. You can also import certificates on the phone web
page. eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports a maximum of ten root certificates and one device
certificate.

l A root certificate is used to verify the identity of other devices that interact with eSpace
7910/eSpace 7950.
l A device certificate shows the identity of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 during phone
authentication.
l The root certificate of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 needs to be compatible with eSight and eSpace
EMS; therefore, sha1 and RSA encryption algorithms are required for the root certificate.
l The following encryption suites are supported: TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA,
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA, TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256, and
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256.
l If the existing root directory is to be updated, the file name of the new certificate must be the same
as that of the certificate to be replaced.
l To ensure the security of your IP phone, replace the root certificate and device certificate in time
after installing your IP phone.
l The phone system time must be within the certificate validity period. It is recommended that you
configure the NTP server for time accuracy.
Applying for a Certificate Using the Proprietary Protocol

You can download a device certificate or root certificate in proprietary protocol mode using
any of the methods described in the following table.
Table 5-13 Certificate download
Method Details
eSight When the IP phone fails to be authenticated using EAP-TLS for network
access, it automatically obtains the new device certificate and key from
the CA server.
DHCP Option Upload the required certificate to the server, and deliver the certificate to
246 the IP phone using DHCP Option 246.
Web 1. On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Server and fill out the
CA server address and port number on the page that is displayed.
NOTE
The IP addresses of the active and standby CA servers can be obtained in SRV
mode according to the CA server domain name.
2. Choose Advanced > Certificates, select Proprietary Protocol, and
click Apply for Certificate.
LCD 1. Choose Apps > Advanced > Server > CA Server and fill out the CA
server address and port number on the page that is displayed.
2. Choose Apps > Advanced > Network > Apply for Certificate,
select Proprietary Protocol, and click Obtain.
Applying for a Certificate Using SCEP

Downloading a Device Certificate

You can download a device certificate in SCEP mode using any of the methods described in
the following table.
Table 5-14 Device certificate download

Method Details
eSight Automatically applying for a device certificate: On the eSight

management portal, choose Business > Collaboration > IP Phone
Management > Deployment Management > Configuration file
Management. Select the corresponding configuration file, click
, and expand the configuration items. On the Deploy and Server
tab pages of the configuration file modification page, modify the
parameters related to automatic device certificate application (see
Table 5-15 for detailed parameter descriptions), and deliver the
configuration file to the IP phone.
DHCP Option 246 Automatically applying for a device certificate: Set parameters
related to automatic device certificate application in the
configuration file and deliver the new configuration file to the IP
phone.
Web 1. On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Server and fill
out the CA server address and port number on the page that is
displayed.
2. Choose Advanced > Certificates, select SCEP, set Account
and Password, and click Apply for Certificate.
LCD 1. Choose Apps > Advanced > Server > CA Server and fill out
the CA server address and port number on the page that is
displayed.
2. Choose Apps > Advanced > Network > Apply for
Certificate, select SCEP, set Account and Password, and
click Obtain.

Parameter Description How to Set How to Modify the
Configuration File
CA CA Indicates the IP Enter the IP address Parameters: addr, port

Server Serve address of the of the CA server. and mode
r server that issues Location: Device >
certificates. ComCfg >
CASERVER
Setting:
l Set addr to the
address of the CA
server.


Configuration File
Port Indicates the port Enter the port number Default:

of the server that of the CA server. capf.company.com
issues certificates. l Set port to the port
number of the CA
server.
Default: 8089
l Set mode to the
certificate
application mode.
Value: 0 or 1
– 0: proprietary
protocol (capf)
– 1: scep
Default: 0
Example:
addr="192.168.1.237"
port="8089" mode="0"
Automati Auto Indicates whether - Parameter:

c Upgrade Appl to enable isAutoApply
y automatic Location: Device >
certificate ComCfg > CertApply
application. If this
function is Value: 0 or 1
enabled, the IP l 0: The IP phone
phone does not
automatically automatically apply
applies for a for a certificate.
certificate. The IP l 1: The IP phone
phone can obtain a automatically
device certificate applies for a
and the certificate after it is
corresponding root connected to the
certificate. network.
Example:
isAutoApply="1"
NOTE
Set isAutoApply to 1
when a lot of IP phones
are involved for easier
operation.


Configuration File
Acco Indicates the Set this parameter to a Parameter:

unt account used for value in format of domainAccount
authentication Domain name\User Location: Device >
when applying for name. The user ComCfg > CertApply
a certificate. corresponding to the
user name must be in Example:
the domain domainAccount="SCE
corresponding to the P\examplename"
domain name and also
must be in the local
IIS_USES group.
Obtain the domain
name and user name
from the CA server
administrator.
Pass Indicates the Obtain the password Parameter: password

word password used for from the CA server Location: Device >
authentication administrator. ComCfg > CertApply
when applying for
a certificate. Example:
password="examplepw
123//"
Downloading a Root Certificate

You can download a root certificate using any of the methods described in the following table.
Obtain the root certificate from the corresponding device administrator.
Table 5-16 Root certificate download

Method Details
eSight Download the root certificate using eSight-assisted unified upgrade.

On the eSight management portal, choose Configuration > IP Phone
Management > IP Phone Upgrade Management > Version
Management and deliver a root certificate to the IP phone. For more
information, see 7.2.1 Batch Upgrade (Using eSight).

Method Details
DHCP Option Upload the root certificate to the server, and deliver the certificate to
246 the IP phone using DHCP Option 246. For more information, see 4.3.1
Batch Configuration.
NOTE
On the DHCP server, you can directly enter the address of the file server where
the certificate file is stored.
l If the file server does not require authentication, the address format is
capf.address=https://File server IP address:Port number/Certificate file
directory/Certificate file name, for example, capf.address=https://
10.166.102.110:80/directory/CA.pem.
l If the file server requires authentication, the address format is
capf.address=https://User name:Password@File server IP address:Port
number/Certificate file directory/Certificate file name, for example,
capf.address=https://username:passwd@10.166.102.110:80/directory/
CA.pem.
Importing a Certificate on the Web Page

On the phone web page, you can directly import the locally stored device certificate, root
certificate, and device key to the IP phone.
Step 1 Log in to the phone web page as the admin user.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Certificates.
Step 3 Import the locally stored root certificate, device certificate, device key and key password.
----End
l The root certificate, device certificate, device key and key password need to be imported orderly.
l The file name cannot contain such characters as ; / ? : @ & # ' = + $ ,.
Viewing Root and Device Certificates

To view on the phone web page
Step 1 Log in to the phone web page as the admin user.
----End
Step 1 Choose Advanced > Certificates.
You can view the version, SN, issuer, owner, effective period (start date and end date), and
key about the device certificate and root certificate on the Certificates page.
The following built-in root certificates are provided in a phone when the phone is delivered
from the factory:
l Huawei Enterprise UC&C ProductLine CA

l huawei_ca

l Huawei Cloud Core Network Product CA

l Symantec Class 3 Secure Server CA
l ucems.huawei.com (preferential root certificate)
l VeriSign Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority
l www.example.com
----End
You can delete a selected root certificate using the corresponding button on the phone web
page.
l The preferential root certificate cannot be deleted and can only be replaced.
l After the IP phone is restored to factory settings, the built-in root certificate that has been deleted or
replaced can be restored.
To view on the phone LCD screen
You can choose Apps > Status > Certificates on the phone screen to view information about
the device certificate and root certificate.
5.7 Service Rights Management

This section describes how to manage phone service rights.
Prerequisites
Related service rights have enabled on the SIP server. For details about how to configure
service rights on the SIP server, see the eSpace EC Product Documentation or the product
documentation of the gateway that serves as the SIP server.
For details about how to obtain related documents, see 3.1 Obtaining Reference Documents.
Context
Before using a service, enable the service rights for the IP phone by following the two steps
below:
1. Set Authorized.
In the configuration file, the parameter corresponding to Authorized is ServiceRight
with two options:
– 0: disables a service right.
– 1: enables a service right.
2. Enter the enable access code and disable access code.
In the configuration file, the parameters corresponding to the enable and disable access
codes are ActiveAccessCode and DeactiveAccessCode.

l In an EC6.X network environment, the service rights and service status modified on the USM or
uPortal server are pushed to the IP phone in real time.
l In a UC2.X network environment, the service rights and service status modified on the U1900 series
gateway or BMU are pushed to the IP phone in real time.
l In an IMS+UC network environment, the AA server automatically pushes the service rights and
access codes to the IP phone, with no need for you to manually configure them.
l Service rights are account-specific. Therefore, select an account first.
l The service status display is phone-specific. If the service status display of an account takes effect,
the IP phone displays the corresponding status. For example, if DND is enabled for an account of the
IP phone, the IP phone displays the DND icon in the status bar. However, the accounts with DND
disabled can still answer incoming calls.
You can manage service rights using three different methods, as listed in Table 5-17.

Method Details

the Service Rights Management tab and
set related parameters on the page that is
displayed.

using the data model tree. Alternatively, use
the TR-069 script to set related parameters.

the IP phone.

> Service Rights Management and set
related parameters on the page that is
displayed.
5.8 Advanced Secretary Service

This section describes how to configure the advanced secretary service in a UC2.X network
environment. In the IMS+UC network environment, the configuration is pushed by the AA. In
the EC6.X network environment, the configuration is pushed by the uPortal. No configuration
is required on the phone.

Prerequisites
l You have set Manager Service to Yes on the manager's phone and Secretary Service to
Yes on the secretary's phone.
l The manager's phone account and the secretary's phone account have been bound to the
advanced secretary service on the SIP server. For detailed operations, see the eSpace EC
Product Documentation. In the EC6.X network environment, see the CloudEC
V600R006 Product Documentation.
Context
In the advanced secretary service, a manager's phone line is bound to the phone line of the
secretary. By default, when the manager's phone has an incoming call, the manager's phone
and the secretary's phone both ring, and the secretary can decide whether to forward the call
to the manager after answering the call.
Scenario
This service has various application scenarios. The following figures depict the line button
configurations in four typical scenarios:
In the EC6.X or UC2.X network environment, a shared line must use a different account from a
common line.
l One manager with one secretary
Figure 5-3 One manager with one secretary
l One manager with two secretaries

Figure 5-4 One manager with two secretaries
l Two managers with one secretary (not supported by eSpace 7910 due to server
restrictions)
Figure 5-5 Two managers with one secretary
l Two managers with two secretaries (not supported by eSpace 7910 due to server
restrictions)

Figure 5-6 Two managers with two secretaries
You can configure the advanced secretary service using three different methods, as listed in
Table 5-18.
Method Details

Management > Configuration file Management, Select the
configuration items. Click the Service Rights Management tab
and set related parameters on the page that is displayed.

Web On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Service Rights
Management and set related parameters on the page that is
displayed.
LCD N/A

5.9 Directory
5.9.1 LDAP Directory

This section describes how to configure an LDAP directory.
Prerequisites
A LDAP server is available. An IP phone can connect to the Windows 2008 Server AD or
EUA server as the LDAP directory server.
An AD server running the Windows Server 2008 operating system is used as the LDAP server
in this section. For details about how to install and configure an AD server, see 8.6 Setting
Up the AD and DNS Servers and 8.7 Editing the Microsoft AD2008 User.
Context
Based on X.500, LDAP is an application protocol for accessing and maintaining distributed
directory information services through the TCP/IP protocol stack. It allows users to quickly
obtain static data about people or resources.
LDAP is applicable to storage of data that needs to be obtained in different locations but does
not change frequently. According to its applicable data type, LDAP is a good choice for
storing the enterprise organizational structure and the phone numbers of enterprise employees.
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports the following LDAP directory functions:
l Searching for a contact: On the directory screen, enter your search terms and press the
Search softkey, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 will search for matching contacts from the
LDAP server and display the contact information. Then, you can select a contact and
place a call or save the contact to your local contact list.
In the search results returned by the LDAP server, if the home number, office number, mobile number,
and soft client of a contact are all empty, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 does not display that contact.
l Search for the calling party's information: After receiving a call, eSpace 7910/eSpace
7950 searches the local contact list for the calling number. If no records are found,
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 searches the LDAP server for the contact and displays the
search result on its LCD screen.
l Searching for user dialed numbers: On the predial or dial screen, each time you press a
number key, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 searches the contact list for that number. If
records are found, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 displays them on its LCD screen. If no
records are found, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 searches the LDAP server when the dial
time expires and displays the search result on its LCD screen.
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports LDAPs, using which data is encrypted before transmission.
You can configure an LDAP directory using three different methods, as listed in Table 5-19.


Method Details
eSight On the eSight management portal, choose Resource >

Server tab and set related parameters on the page that is
displayed.

Alternatively, upload the script to set related parameters.
Web On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Server and set
LCD On the home screen, choose Apps > Advanced > Servers and
set related parameters on the page that is displayed.
Parameter Settings
Table 5-20 lists the LDAP directory parameters that you must set.

the Configuration
File
Directory Server Specifies the Select LDAP. Parameter: Type

directory type. Location: Device >
ComCfg > EADDR
Value: 0, 1, 2
l 0: Directory
l 1: LDAP
directory
l 2: uPortal
directory
Default value:
l EC6.X: 2
l UC2.X: 0
Example: Type="1"


the Configuration
File
LDAP Server IP Indicates the address Enter an IP address Parameter:

of the LDAP server. or domain name. ServerAddr
Example: Location: Device >
192.168.1.237 or ComCfg > LDAP
test.example.com Example:
NOTE Several="192.168.1.
The LDAP server 237" or
supports SRV
ServerAddr="test.ex
resolution. A
maximum of three IP ample.com "
addresses can be
resolved from the
server domain name.
LDAP Port Indicates the port Enter a value based Parameter:

number of the on your network ServerPort
LDAP server. environment. Location: Device >
Default value: 389 ComCfg > LDAP
Value range: Example:
0-65535 ServerPort="389"


the Configuration
File
Root Node Indicates the Set this parameter Parameter:

location of the based on the RootNode
contact to query in location of the Location: Device >
the LDAP directory. contact to query in ComCfg > LDAP
According to LDAP the LDAP directory.
Example:
rules, the root node Example: RootNode="dc=test,
has three attributes: l Set this dc=example,dc=com
l dc: domain parameter to "
component dc=test,dc=exa
l ou: mple,dc=com if
organizational you want to
unit query all contacts
in the
l cn: common test.example.co
name, which is m domain.
unique
l Set this
parameter to
ou=Department,
dc=test,dc=exa
mple,dc=com if
you want to
query all contacts
under the
organizational
unit Department
in the
dc=test,dc=exa
mple,dc=com
domain.
l Set this
parameter to
cn=Jack,
ou=Department,
dc=test,dc=exa
mple,dc=com if
you want to
query the contact
Jack under the
organizational
unit Department
in the
dc=test,dc=exa
mple,dc=com
domain.


the Configuration
File
User Name Indicates the user Set the user name to Parameter:
name for logging in Display name@AD Username
to the LDAP server. server domain name, Location: Device >
in which the Display ComCfg > LDAP
name can be found
in the domain user Example:
properties on the AD Username="example
server. For example, name"
if the Display name
is administrator, set
the user name to
administrator@exam
ple.com.
Password Indicates the Enter the password Parameter:

password for of the domain user. Password
logging in to the Location: Device >
LDAP server. ComCfg > LDAP
Example:
Password="example
pw123//"
LDAP Filter Specifies the search Set the fields based Parameter: FilterStr
fields to support for on requirements. Location: Device >
contact search from eSpace 7910/eSpace ComCfg > LDAP
the LDAP directory 7950 supports
on the Directory multiple search Example:
screen. fields. For details FilterStr="mobile
about the fields, see department"
Table 5-21. Spaces
are required between
search fields if you
need to specify
multiple search
fields.
For example, if you
need to search for
contacts by name,
phone number,
department, home
phone, and IP
phone, enter
displayName
telephoneNumber
department
homePhone
ipPhone.


the Configuration
File
LDAP Number Specifies the query eSpace 7910/eSpace Parameter:

Attribute fields to support for 7950 supports six FilterPhoneNumber
contact search from types of search Str
the LDAP directory fields: homePhone, Location: Device >
when a call comes in pager, mobile, ComCfg >
or when a call is facsimileTelephone- SearchAttr
placed. Number, ipPhone,
and Example:
telephoneNumber. FilterPhoneNumber
Spaces are required Str="mobile
between search ipPhone"
fields if you need to
specify multiple
search fields.
For example, if you
need to search for
contacts by mobile
number and IP
phone number, enter
mobile ipPhone.
Max Records in Indicates the Enter a value based Parameter:

Search Result maximum number on your network searchResultMax
of records displayed environment. Location: Device >
in the search result. Default value: 10 ComCfg > LDAP
Value range: 1-60 Example:
SearchResultMax="
10"
Search Timeout Indicates the Enter a value based Parameter:

Duration duration within on your network LdapWaitTime
which the server is environment. Location: Device >
required to return Default value: 10 ComCfg > LDAP
data after you
pressed the Search Value range: 1-60 Example:
softkey for contact LdapWaitTime="10"
search.


the Configuration
File
LDAP Details Specifies the fields Each LDAP Details Parameter:

Attribute for LDAP details. Attribute parameter displayName, title,
For each field, fill supports the fields in department,
out a mapping field Table 5-21. telephoneNumber,
on the AD server. You are advised to mobile, homePhone,
use the default ipPhone
value. Location: Device >
ComCfg >
SearchAttr
Example:
displayName="displ
ayName"
Table 5-21 describes the mapping between parameters on the AD server and LDAP fields.
Table 5-21 Mapping between parameters on the AD server and LDAP fields
Parameter on the AD Server LDAP Field
First name sn
Last name givenName
Initials initial
Display name displayName
Description description
Office physicalDeliveryOfficeName
Telephone number telephoneNumber
E-mail mail
Web page wWWHomePage
Country/region c
State/Province st
City l
Street streetAddress
P.O.Box postOfficeBox
Zip/Post Code postalCode
Home homePhone

Parameter on the AD Server LDAP Field
Pager pager
Mobile mobile
Fax facsimileTelephoneNumber
IP phone ipPhone
Notes info
Job Title title
Department department
Company company
5.9.2 uPortal Directory

This section describes how to set the uPortal directory in the EC6.X network environment.
Prerequisites
A uPortal server has been established.
Context
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports the following RCS directory functions:
l Searching for a contact: On the directory screen, enter your search terms and press the
Search softkey. eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 will search for matching contacts from the
uPortal server and display the contact information and profile pictures. Then, you can
select a contact and place a call or save the contact to your local contact list.
l Search for the calling or called party' information: After receiving or initiating a call,
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 searches the local contact list for the calling or called number.
If no record is found, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 searches the uPortal server for the
contact and displays the search result including the contact information and profile
picture on its LCD screen.
You can configure an uPortal directory using three different methods, as listed in Table 5-22.


Method Details
eSight On the eSight management portal, choose Business > Collaboration > IP
Phone Management > Deployment Management > Configuration file
Management. Select the corresponding configuration file, click , and
expand the configuration items. Click the Server tab and set uPortal
Server and Port on the page that is displayed.
TMS The TMS delivers the uPortal server address and port number.
Web On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Server > uPortal Server and
modify Server and Port.
LCD On the phone LCD screen, choose Apps > Advanced > Servers and
modify uPortal Server and Port.
Parameter Settings
Table 5-23 lists the directory parameters that you must set.

Configuration File
uPortal Server Indicates the The value can be an Parameter:

address of the IP address or a UPortalServerAddress
uPortal server. domain name. Location: Device >
Example: ComCfg > Phone >
192.168.1.237 or Server
test.example.com Example:
UPortalServerAd-
dress="192.168.1.237" or
UPortalServerAd-
dress="test.example.com
"
NOTE
The uPortal server supports
HTTPS by default.
Port Indicates the port Value range: 0-65535 Parameter:

number of the Default: 80 UPortalServerPort
uPortal server. Location: Device >
ComCfg > Phone >
Server
Example:
UPortalServerPort="443"


Configuration File
Directory Server Indicates the Select uPortal. Parameter: Type

directory type. Location: Device >
ComCfg > EADDR
Setting:
l 1: LDAP directory
l 2: uPortal directory
Default: 2
Example: Type="2"
Server Indicates the You are advised to use Parameter:

address of the the value delivered by PrimaryEaddrServer-
directory server. the uPortal server. Address
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Phone >
Server
Example:
PrimaryEaddrServerAd-
dress="https://
192.168.22.237:443/
services" or
PrimaryEaddrServerAd-
dress="https://
test.example.com:443/
services"
Image Server Indicates the You are advised to use Parameter:

address of the the value delivered by primaryAddr
profile picture the uPortal server. Location: Device >
server. ComCfg > ImageServer
Example:
primaryAddr="https://
192.168.22.237:443/
headportrait" or
primaryAddr="https://
test.example.com:443/
headportrait"
5.9.3 UC Directory
This section describes how to configure a UC directory.
Context
The directory supports two search methods, by name, by phone number and by department.

l Search by name
You can search for a contact by first name, last name, initials or abbreviations, or full
name.
For example, if a contact's name is Mary Wong, you can enter Mary, Wong, MW, or
Mary Wrong for a search.
l Search by phone number
You can search for a contact by fixed-line, mobile, or other numbers.
l Search by department
You can search for a contact by department.
In the directory of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, a contact's profile picture displayed on the phone screen is
the profile picture that the contact has customized on the soft client. However, if a contact does not
customize his/her profile file but uses a profile picture provided by the soft client system, eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950 displays the phone's default profile picture for that contact on the phone screen, but not the
one provided by the soft client system.
The contact information searched out from the directory can be managed on the BMU in a
unified manner. For details, see the eSpace EC Product Documentation.
You can configure a UC directory using four different methods, as listed in Table 5-24.

Method Details

Server tab and set related parameters on the page that is
displayed.

LCD On the phone LCD screen, choose Apps > Advanced > Server
> Directory > Directory Server and set related parameters on
the screen that is displayed.
Parameter Settings
Table 5-25 lists the directory parameters that you must set.


Parameter Description How to Set How to Set How to
(UC2.X) (IMS+UC) Modify the
Configuration
File
Directory Specifies the Set this Set this Parameter:

Server directory type. parameter to parameter to Type
l When the Directory. Directory. Location:
UC Device >
directory is ComCfg >
used, select EADDR >
Directory. Type
l When the Value: 0 or 1
LDAP l 0: directory
directory is
used, select l 1: LDAP
LDAP. directory
Only UC2.X, Default: 0

and IMS+UC Example:
networks Type="0"
support the UC
directory.
In the UC2.X l Directory(U - Parameter:

network, you C2.X): The Uctype
can also choose HUAWEIU Location:
Directory(UC2. C protocol is Device >
X) and used for ComCfg >
Directory(UC1. connecting UC10
1). to the
directory. Setting:
l Directory(U l 0: The
C1.1): The UC1.1
UC1.1 protocol is
protocol is used for
used for connecting
connecting to the
to the directory.
directory. l 1: The
HUAWEIU
C protocol is
used for
connecting
to the
directory.
Default: 1
Example:
Uctype=1


Configuration
File
Directory Indicates the Set Directory The settings for Parameters:

Server directory server. Server and Directory PrimaryEAdd
Port. Server 1 and rServerAddres
l Server Port are s,
automatically PrimaryEAdd
– When pushed by the rServerPort,
the AA server. BackupEAddr
HTTP Therefore, you ServerAddress
protocol do not need to , and
(default) manually enter BackupEAddr
is used, them. If active ServerPort
enter and standby
IPaddres Location:
directories have Device >
s or been deployed
domain ComCfg >
for redundancy Phone >
name of backup,
the Server
manually set
AppAgen Directory Setting:
t server, Server 2 and l Set
for Port. PrimaryEA
example, ddrServerA
192.168. Default port:
8090 ddress to
1.14. the address
– When of the active
the directory
HTTPS server.
protocol l Set
is used, PrimaryEA
enter ddrServerP
https://I ort to the
P port number
address of the active
or directory
domain server.
name of
the l Set
AppAgen BackupEA
tserver, ddrServerA
for ddress to
example, the address
https:// of the
192.168. standby
1.14. directory
server (only
l Port in IMS
– When +UC).
the l Set
BackupEA


Configuration
File
HTTP ddrServerP
protocol ort to the
(default) port number
is used, of the
use the standby
default directory
value 80. server (only
– When in IMS
the +UC).
HTTPS Example:
protocol PrimaryEAddrS
is used, erverAddress="
set this 192.168.1.14"
paramete and
r to 443 PrimaryEAddrS
or 8443. erverPort="80"
In actual (in UC2.X)
scenarios
, use the
port
specified
on the
server.
Follow-up Procedure
You can log in to eSpace 7910 or eSpace 7950 and use the navigation buttons to access the
Contacts screen and then to the Directory tab to query contact information from the
directory. For details, see the User Guide of eSpace 7910 or eSpace 7950.
5.9.4 Directory (VFOneNet)

This section describes how to configure a directory.
Context
The directory supports two search methods, by name and by phone number.
l Search by name
You can search for a contact by first name, last name, initials or abbreviations, or full
name.
For example, if a contact's name is Mary Wong, you can enter Mary, Wong, MW, or
Mary Wong for a search.
l Search by phone number
You can search for a contact by fixed-line, mobile, or other numbers.

In the directory of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, a contact's profile picture displayed on the phone screen is
the profile picture that the contact has customized on the soft client. However, if a contact does not
customize his/her profile file but uses a profile picture provided by the soft client system, eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950 displays the phone's default profile picture for that contact on the phone screen, but not the
one provided by the soft client system.
You can configure a directory using three different methods, as listed in Table1
Configuration methods.

Method Details
DHCP Option Set related parameters in the configuration file and deliver the new
246 configuration file to the IP phone.
Web On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Server and set related
parameters on the page that is displayed.
LCD On the phone LCD screen, choose Apps > Advanced > Server >
Directory > Directory Server and set related parameters on the screen
that is displayed.
Parameter Settings
lists the directory parameters that you must set.

Param Description How to Set How to Modify the
eter Configuration File
Directo Specifies the Set this parameter Parameter: Type

ry directory type. to Location: Device > ComCfg >
Server l When the Directory(VFOne EADDR > Type
XML Net).
Value: 1 or 3
directory is
used, select l 1: LDAP directory
Directory(VF l 3: Directory(VFOneNet)
OneNet). Default: 3
l When the Example: Type="3"
LDAP
directory is
used, select
LDAP.

Param Description How to Set How to Modify the

eter Configuration File
Directo Indicates the Set Directory Parameters: PrimaryEAddrServer-

ry directory server. Server. Address
Server Format of the Location: Device > ComCfg >
directory server Phone > Server
address: https:// Setting: Set PrimaryEAddrServer-
directory server IP Address to the address of the active
address:port/ directory server
example/
CdiResults.aspx? Example: PrimaryEAddrServerAd-
dress="https://10.174.16.221:44321/
NOTE
Huawei/CdiResults.aspx?"
The directory
supports only
HTTPS.
Search Indicates the Enter a value based Parameter: WaitTime

Timeou duration within on your network Location: Device > ComCfg >
t which the server environment. EADDR > WaitTime
Duratio is required to Value range: 10–
n return data after Example: WaitTime="20"
30s
you pressed the
Search softkey Default value: 20
for contact search.
5.9.5 Importing and Exporting Contacts

You can import and export contacts on the phone web page. In addition, eSpace 7950 allows
users to import and export contacts through a USB device.

Table 5-28 Importing and Exporting Contacts

Mode Importing Contacts Exporting Contacts
Importing and exporting You can import the contact Before exporting contacts,
contacts through the LCD file in .csv or .vCard format insert a USB device.
screen (supported only by using a USB device. The 1. Press the Contacts
eSpace 7950) contact file only in the root button.
directory of a USB device
can be imported. Before 2. Press More to navigate
importing contacts, insert to Export and press
the USB device. Export.
NOTE
1. Press the Contacts The exported contact
button. information is saved in a .csv
2. Press More to navigate file.
to Import and press
Import.
3. Select a contact file to
import.
4. Press Select.
Importing and exporting 1. Log in to the phone web 1. Log in to the phone web
contacts on the web page page as a user and page as a user and
choose Preferences > choose Preferences >
Contacts. Contacts.
2. On the My Contacts tab, 2. On the My Contacts tab,
click Import. click Export.
3. Double-click the contact 3. Select the contact file
file to import. format and click Export.
l When you import a modified .csv contact file to the phone as a new one, ensure that the contact file
information is correct and the encoding format is UTF-8.
For example, you can open the .csv file using Excel, change the cell format to the text format, edit
the contact information, and save the file in the CSV (comma delimited) format. After the file is
saved, open the file in Notepad and change the file encoding format to UTF-8.
l This function involves personal data. When using this function, comply with local laws and
regulations, and take sufficient measures to protect personal data.
5.10 Instant Conference, Group Conference, and

Converged Conference
This section describes how to configure instant conference and group conference services in
an IMS+UC and UC2.X network environment as well as the converged conference service in
a UC2.X network environment. The IP phone supports interconnection with the converged
conference of eSpace EC V300R001 solution from V200R003C00SPCe00.

Prerequisites
l In the EC6.X network environment, the instant conference service rights have been
enabled for the IP phone on the uPortal server. For more information, see the CloudEC
Product Documentation. Instant, group conference, and converged conferences support
PCMA, PCMU, G729, G722, and iLBC codecs.
l In the UC2.X network environment, the instant conference service rights have been
enabled for the IP phone on the eSpace U1900 series unified gateway. For more
information, see the eSpace UC V200R002C00 Product Documentation. Instant, group
conference, and converged conferences support PCMA, PCMU, G729, G722, and iLBC
codecs.
l In the IMS+UC network environment, the voice conference function has been enabled
for the IP phone. For more information, see the eSpace EC Product Documentation.
Instant and group conferences support PCMA, PCMU, G729, and iLBC/8000 codecs.
The AA server automatically pushes the conference service rights to the IP phone.
Context
When the IP phone is idle or in a call, a user can initiate an instant conference by pressing the
Conf softkey. A user also can initiate a group conference from a contact group by pressing the
Conf softkey when the IP phone is idle.
You can configure instant conference, group conference, and converged conference services
using three different methods, as listed in Table 5-29.
Method Details

the Call Settings tab and set related


the IP phone.
Web N/A

Method Details
LCD N/A
Parameter Settings
The default conference mode of the IP phone can be an instant conference or a local
conference, depending on the account rights.
l If the account has been assigned instant conference rights on both the IP phone and
server, the default conference mode is an instant conference.
l If the account has not been assigned instant conference rights on both the IP phone and
server, the default conference mode is a local conference.
l Starting from V200R003C00SPC500, you can turn on or off conference by using Web. When
Enable is selected, the default meeting mode of the IP phone keeps unchanged; when Disable is
selected, the IP Phone is not allowed to create a conference.
l Ensure that SRTP under Apps > ADVANCED > Network Security is set to Mandatory or
Optional if you need to join an encrypted conference.
5.11 Extension Mobility

This section describes how to configure the extension mobility service in the EC6.X network
environment.
Prerequisites
l The extension mobility service user has an account created on the uPortal server and the
account has been bound to an IP phone.
l The configuration file of the IP phone in the home place is in the same format as that in
the visiting place. The extension mobility function has been enabled on the server for
both IP phones in the home and visited places.
l The eSight/TMS server is available.
NOTICE
If you use the eSight file server that runs the Windows operating system as the extension
mobility server, install the server in the root directory. Otherwise, the extension mobility
service is unavailable.
Context
After a user logs in to an IP phone and modifies user configurations, extension mobility
automatically synchronizes the modified user configurations to the corresponding file on the
server. When the user successfully logs in to another IP phone using the same account, this IP
phone automatically obtains the latest user configurations from the server.

l Use the main account (namely, the phone's first account) for remote login.
l The user configurations include the contacts, contact groups, call history, conference
records, programmable buttons, server addresses, and services to which the user has
subscribed. (When contacts on the IP phone are synchronized from the server, the local
contacts saved on the IP phone are deleted.)
l In the IMS+UC network environment, if the current login account is a roaming account
(which is an account logged in to another phone for extension mobility), the IP phone
automatically logs out of this account and returns to the login screen when a specific
period (configured by your system administrator) expires.
l The IP phone can automatically upload the modified configurations to the server
periodically.
Scenario
Users can use this service when they have moved to and worked temporarily at another
location within the company network.
You can configure the extension mobility service using four different methods, as listed in
Table 5-30.

Method Details

corresponding configuration file and expand the configuration
items. Click the Server tab and configure the profile server on the
page that is displayed.
TMS Log in to the TMS, find the desired device, and access the
Subscriber/Device Operation window. In the pane on the left of
the window, click Data Model Tree and deliver the personal
configuration file server using the data model tree. Alternatively,
use the TR-069 script to set related parameters.
NOTE
Before using the extension mobility function, set TR-069 parameters
Device.UserInterface.X_001E10_TR069Cfg.X_001E10_Type and
Device.Services.VoiceService.Capabilities.X_ExtensionMobilityCapa-
bilities to 1 on the TMS.
DHCP Option 246 Set related parameters in the configuration file and deliver the new
Web On the phone web page, choose Advanced > Server and configure
the profile server on the page that is displayed.
LCD On the phone LCD screen, choose Apps > Advanced > Server >
Profile Server and configure the profile server on the screen that
is displayed.

Parameter Settings
Table 5-31 lists the extension mobility parameters that you must set.

the Configuration
File
Extension Indicates whether to enable Set this parameter Parameter: enable

Mobility extension mobility. based on site Location: Device >
requirements. Two ComCfg > profile
options are
available: Value: 0 or 1
l Enable: enable l 0: disable

extension l 1: enable
mobility. Default: 0
l Disable: disable
extension
mobility.
Call History Indicates whether to enable Set this parameter Parameter:

Mobility call history mobility in based on site CalllogSync
extension mobility. requirements. Two Location: Device >
options are ComCfg > profile
available:
Value: 0 or 1
l Enable: enable
call history l 0: The call
mobility in history is not
extension uploaded.
mobility. l 1: The call
l Disable: disable history is
call history uploaded.
mobility in Default: 0
extension
mobility.


the Configuration
File
Profile l Indicates the profile Set the address and Parameters:

Server server that stores the port number of the PrimaryProfileSer-
contacts, call history, and eSight/TMS server. verAddress,
configuration file in an Address: PrimaryProfileSer-
EC6.X, UC2.X and IMS verPort,
network environment. If both active and BackupProfileSer-
standby profile verAddress, and
l Indicates the profile
servers have been BackupProfileSer-
server that stores the call
deployed, set Profile verPort
history and configuration
Server 1 to the
file in IMS+UC network Location: Device >
environment. ComCfg > Phone >
profile server and
NOTE Server
Profile Server 2 to
In IMS+UC network Example:
the address of the
environment, contact
standby profile PrimaryProfileSer-
information is saved on the
PGM server. The PGM server server. verAddress="192.16
address is automatically NOTE
8.1.33",
pushed by the AA server. You When the IP phone PrimaryProfileSer-
do not need to manually interworks with the verPort="38444",
configure it. HTTPS personal BackupProfileSer-
Active and standby profile configuration file verAddress="192.16
servers can be configured server, enter the 8.1.34", and
server address in
for redundancy backup. The BackupProfileSer-
format of https://
IP phone first attempts to Server address. verPort="38444"
download files from profile
server 1 (active profile Port:
server). If the connection l If eSight is used
times out, the IP phone tries as the server for
to download files from extension
profile server 2 (standby mobility:
profile server).
– Set the port
number to
38081 if the
HTTP
protocol is
used.
– Set the port
number to
38444 or
9444 if the
HTTPS
protocol is
used.
l If the TMS is
used as the
server for
extension
mobility:


the Configuration
File
– Set the port

number to
8447 if the
HTTP
protocol is
used.
– Set the port
number to
8446 if the
HTTPS
protocol is
used.
5.12 Hunt Group

This section describes how to configure a hunt group in an EC6.X or UC2.X network
environment.
Prerequisites
l In the EC6.X network environment, the hunt group service rights have been enabled for
the IP phone on the uPortal server. For more information, see the CloudEC V600R006
Product Documentation.
l In the UC2.X network environment, the hunt group service rights have been enabled for
the IP phone on the eSpace U1900 series unified gateway. For more information, see the
eSpace UC V200R003 Product Documentation.
Context
In an enterprise, employees in the same field can be added to a hunt group, with the group
access code configured. After a user dials the access code of this hunt group, the system calls
members in the hunt group, and the phones in the hunt group ring in the specified ringing
mode (simultaneous ringing, sequential ringing, or cyclic ringing). If no one in the hunt group
answers the call, the call is transferred to the voicemail or a specific number.
The implementation (sign-in/sign-out mode, ringing mode, and call transfer mode) of the hunt
group function varies depending on the administrator's configuration policies.
l Dynamic sign-in: Members in a hunt group can manually sign in to and sign out of the
hunt group. If authentication is required, members need to enter a 6-digit password as
prompted before sign-in or sign-out.
l Static sign-in: Members in a hunt group are automatically signed in. They cannot sign
out.

l Hunt group members can ask their system administrator for the authentication password.
l If an incorrect password is entered for one consecutive times, the sign-in or sign-out fails.
When a call comes in to a hunt group, idle phones in this hunt group ring in the specified
ringing mode.
l Default: Only phones with the highest priority ring.
l Simultaneous ringing: Phones in the hunt group ring simultaneously.
l Sequential ringing: Phones in the hunt group ring in a specific sequence. The phones that
already rang do not ring again.
l Cyclic ringing: Phones in the hunt group ring in a specific sequence. If no one answers
the call within the first cycle, the phones ring again in the specific sequence until the
maximum ringing duration (default: 60s) expires.
Procedure
Step 1 Enter the IP address of eSpace7910/eSpace 7950 and log in to the web page.
Step 2 Choose Call Features > Conference.

The Conference page is displayed.
Step 3 Select Conference on hold when adding participants or Conference unhold when adding
participants for Three-Party Call as required.
----End
You can configure the hunt group service using three different methods, as listed in Table
5-32.

Method Details

displayed.

the IP phone.

Method Details

> Service Rights Management, and
configure the hunt group rights, hunt group
sign-in code, hunt group sign-out code,
virtual voicemail rights, and voicemail
access code.
5.13 Paging Group

This section describes how to configure a paging group in a UC2.X network environment.
Prerequisites
You have obtained panging from the SIP server administrator.
Context
The following table lists the modes supported by the eSpace 7910 and 7950 to implement the
paging group.
Voice Broadcast Mode Description Requirements on

Recipients
unicast The system uses conference You have obtained panging

resources to invite paging from the SIP server
group members and administrator.
complete unidirectional
transmission of voice. The
maximum number of
recipients is restricted by
conference resources.

Voice Broadcast Mode Description Requirements on

Recipients
multicast The system creates a virtual You have obtained panging

participant, adds the virtual from the SIP server
participant to a conference, administrator.
and uses the IP multicast To use the multicast
function of switches or function, choose Call
routers to forward RTP Settings > Multicast on the
media streams to paging phone web page, enable
group members to Multicast.
implement the voice
broadcast function. This
mode occupies only one
channel of conference
resources, which is used by
the virtual participant. To
use this mode, all switches
and routers through which
media streams pass must
support the IP multicast
function.
Figure 5-7 shows the basic service scenario of paging group.
Figure 5-7 Basic service scenario of paging group

l Basic service scenario

The service process is as follows:
a. An initiator dials the access code of a paging group, and speaks after hearing a
beep.
b. The voice broadcast players of all FXS members in the paging group play the voice
broadcast, and the IP phones of all unicast and multicast parties respond as follows:
n If a recipient is idle or has not started a call after picking up the phone, the
speaker is automatically started and plays the voice broadcast after a beep.
n If a recipient is in a call, the voice broadcast is played as a whisper in audio
mixing mode.
n If a recipient has enabled the DND service, the system determines whether to
play the voice broadcast to the recipient based on the service priority
configured for the paging group.
c. The initiator stops speaking and hangs up. The voice broadcast is stopped for all
recipients.
l A recipient using an IP phone can press the Hung Up soft button, hands-free button, or headset
button to stop listening to the current voice broadcast.
l By default, all members in a paging group are forced to listen to the voice broadcast.
l A paging group supports only one channel of voice broadcast at a time. If an initiator is
broadcasting, other initiators cannot initiate voice broadcasts.
l When you have joined multiple paging groups simultaneously, you cannot receive any new paging
call if you are the calling party, but can still initiate a channel of paging broadcast if you are the
called party.
You can configure the paging group using four different methods, as listed in Table 5-33.
Method Details

displayed.


Method Details

the IP phone.
Web On the phone web page, choose Call

Settings > Multicast, set related
parameters.
LCD N/A
Parameter Settings
Table 5-34 lists the paging group parameters that you must set.

Parameter How to Set How to Modify the
Configuration File
Multicast Multicast enable. Parameter: ServiceRight

Location: Device > Usercfg
> Paging
Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disables Multicast
l 1: enables Multicast
Default: 0
Example: ServiceRight="1"
Address Multicast IP address in the Parameter: PagingIP

A.B.C.D format. Location: Device > Usercfg
Only IPv4 addresses are > Paging
supported, and the value Value: Only IPv4 addresses
ranges from 224.0.1.0 to are supported.
239.255.255.255.
Default: There is no default
value.
Port Multicast port number. Parameter: PagingPort

Location: Device > Usercfg
> Paging
Value: The value is a
number ranging from 1024
to 65535.
Example:
PagingPort="1026"


Configuration File
Group Name Paging group name Parameter:

displayed on phones of the PagingGroupName
initiators and recipients of a Location: Device > Usercfg
paging group. > Paging
Value: The value is a unique
and case-insensitive string
consisting of 1 to 32
characters.
Example:
PagingGroupName="12"
Group Number Paging group ID that Parameter:

uniquely identifies a paging PagingGroupNumber
group. Location: Device > Usercfg
> Paging
characters.
Example:
PagingGroupNumber="12"
Ptime Packetization time on IP Parameter: PagingPtime

phones of multicast parties. Location: Device > Usercfg
> Paging
characters.
Default: 0
Example: PagingPtime="20"
Codec Codec used by IP phones of Parameter: Pagingcodec

multicast parties. Location: Device > Usercfg
> Paging
Value: PCMA, PCMU,
G729, AMR-WB, iLBC,
G722, G722_24, G722_32.
Default: PCMA
Example:
Pagingcodec="PCMA"


Configuration File
PT Payload value on IP phones Parameter: PayloadType

of multicast parties. Location: Device > Usercfg
> Paging
Value: The value ranges
from 96 to 127.
NOTE
The payload value can be
configured only for codecs
AMR_WB, iLBC_1520,
iLBC_1333, G7221_24, and
G7221_32.
Example: PayloadType="8"
Follow-up Procedure
For details, see the eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone User Guide.
5.14 Redundancy
This section describes how to configure redundancy for the IP phone.
Context
SIP server redundancy
A maximum of five SIP server addresses can be configured for an eSpace 7910/7950, and so
can the proxy server addresses. The five servers have similar functions but different priorities.
When SIP servers 1-4 are faulty, the IP phone connects to SIP server 5 to ensure functional
services.
The rule for registration retry on a server is as follows: An IP phone retries registration to a
SIP server at an interval of T1, 2 x T1, 4 x T1, 8 x T1, and so on. When the interval is equal to
or greater than T2, the IP phone retries registration at intervals of T2 until the total retry time
reaches 8 x T2. T1 and T2 are SIP signaling parameters. The default value of T1 is 500 ms
and that of T2 is 4000 ms.
Rule for sequential registration: An IP phone sends a registration request to SIP server 1 and
if this server fails to respond, the IP phone retries its registration following the rule for
registration retry on a server within 3s. If the registration still fails 3s later, the IP phone stops
its retry and sends a registration request to SIP server 2. The subsequent process is the same
as the preceding description, which is sending a registration request to the next server upon 3s
retry failures. The 3s interval is not configurable.
uPortal redundancy
l For an office with the DNS server
The common domain name of the uPortal server can be resolved into two sub-domain
names using SRV, corresponding to two sites. The sub-domain name corresponding to

the home site has a higher priority. Each sub-domain name can match at most six IP
addresses. The IP phones select two random IP addresses corresponding to the home site
for login attempts.
If the login is successful, the uPortal server returns the site information of the IP phone
users' home area, and the IP phones use this site as the primary site and use the other site
as the secondary site.
If the login fails, the IP phones switch to two random IP addresses corresponding to the
secondary site for login attempts.
If the login is successful, the IP phone detects whether the primary site recovers every 30
minutes. Once detecting that primary site recovers, the IP phones triggers authentication
on the primary site again.
Later, users preferentially use the home area's sites for connection and authentication;
when the uPortal connection is updated at intervals, the local site is used preferentially
for connection attempts.
l In the EC6.X networking environment, the server whitelist verification is supported. Only
numbers registered at the primary and secondary sites of the uPortal can make calls.
l If the uPortal authentication fails and only the SIP server address is configured, the emergency
login scenario can only ensure that the numbers can make outgoing calls and receive incoming
calls from others registered with the same SIP server.
Figure 5-8 uPortal DNS-SRV Redundancy Implementation Mechanism
l For an office without the DNS server

Enter multiple uPortal IP addresses for redundancy.
ACS server redundancy (TR069 redundancy)
The domain name of the ACS server supports DNS SRV and A record resolution.

l DNS SRV resolution

The domain name of the ACS server is resolved using the SRV to obtain the IP addresses
of the active and standby eSight servers. IP phones preferentially connect to the active
eSight server. When the active eSight server is faulty, IP phones automatically connect to
the standby eSight server. After the active eSight server recovers, IP phones
automatically switch back to the active eSight server.
l A record resolution
The domain name of the ACS server can be resolved using the A record to obtain several
IP addresses (with no priorities distinguished). If three or more IP addresses are returned,
IP phones use two IP addresses for access.
When eSight is used to deliver deployment tasks, the IP phone can obtain the IP address by
resolving the domain name of the file server through the DNS. In this way, the DR function is
implemented.
Call redundancy
eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP phones support redundancy of the call service.
When the IP phone initiates a call but the current server does not respond, a call failure
message is displayed and re-registration is triggered. Call redundancy uses sequential
registration. When the IP phone switches to another server for registration and successfully
registers with this server, the user only needs to press the call button and then the IP phone
initiates the call from the currently registered server.
In the preceding redundancy scenarios, if the domain name solution is used, DNS domain name
resolution must be configured. For details about how to configure DNS domain name resolution in
different scenarios, see Special Topics > Disaster Recovery (DR) > Configuring the DNS in the
CloudEC Product Documentation.
You can configure the redundancy function using three different methods, as listed in Table
5-35.

Method Details

configuration items. Click the Server tab and set related

Method Details
TMS Log in to the TMS, find the desired device, and access the
Subscriber/Device Operation window. In the pane on the left of
the window, click Data Model Tree and deliver the server address
using the data model tree. Alternatively, use the TR-069 script to
set related parameters.
DHCP Option 246 Set related parameters in the configuration file and deliver the new
Parameter Settings
Table 5-36 lists the parameters that you must set for the redundancy function.


the Configuration
File
Disaster Recovery l Sequential: The Default: In a UC2.X, Parameter:

IP phone sends IMS or IMS+UC DisasterRecovery-
registration network Mode
messages to a environment, the Location: Device >
SIP server at default value is ComCfg > Phone >
intervals of half Sequential. Environment
of the
registration Value range: 0 or 1
interval. If the l 0: Sequential
active SIP server l 1: Simultaneous
fails, the IP
phone registers Example:
with the standby DisasterRecovery-
SIP server. If the Mode="1"
standby SIP
server also fails,
the IP phone
registers with the
local SIP server.
Services are
interrupted
during the SIP
server switching.
After the IP
phone registers
with a SIP server
successfully, its
services become
available again.
l Simultaneous:
The IP phone
registers with the
active, standby,
and local SIP
servers at the
same time. If the
active SIP server
fails, the standby
SIP server takes
over the services.
If the standby
SIP server also
fails, the local
SIP server takes
over the services.
The switching


the Configuration
File
takes about 3s,

which is
insensible to
users. After the
switching,
services are
running properly.


the Configuration
File
SIP Server Specifies the phone Enter the IP address Parameters:

registration mode of the SIP server PrimaryRegServer-
and the SIP server based on your Address,
address. network BackupRegServer-
NOTE environment. Address, and
Server 1, Server 2, l In an EC6.X LocalRegServerAd
Server 3, Server 4,
network dress
and Server 5
represent the active environment, the Location: Device >
SIP server, standby SIP server is the ComCfg > Phone >
SIP server, standby CloudUSM Server
SIP server 2, standby server. Enter the Setting:
SIP server 3, and domain name of
local SIP server l PrimaryRegSer
respectively.
the CloudUSM
verAddress: Set
server.
When the server this parameter to
switches to Server 3, l In a UC2.X the address of the
Server 4 or Server 5, network active SIP server.
environment, the
is displayed in l BackupRegServ
SIP server is a
the status bar of the erAddress: Set
phone. gateway of the
this parameter to
eSpace U1900
the address of the
series or
standby SIP
EGW1500 series.
server.
l In an IMS+UC
l BackupRegServ
or UC2.0
er2Address: Set
network
this parameter to
environment, the
the address of
SIP server is a
standby SIP
gateway of the
server 2.
eSpace U2900
series. The SIP l BackupRegServ
server setting is er3Address: Set
automatically this parameter to
pushed by the the address of
AA server. standby SIP
server 3.
l In an IMS
network l LocalRegServer
environment, this Address: Set this
parameter is set parameter to the
by the address of the
administrator. local SIP server.
l In a CC network Example:
environment, the PrimaryRegServer-
SIP server is a Address="192.168.1
gateway of the .9"
eSpace U2900
series, a
UAP3300, or a


the Configuration
File
Session Border
Controller
(SBC).
l In a third-party
SIP server
network
environment, the
SIP server is a
third-party SIP
server.


the Configuration
File
SIP Server Port Indicates the port Enter the port Parameters:
number of the SIP number of the SIP PrimaryRegServer-
server. server based on your Port,
network BackupRegServer-
environment. Port, and
l In an IMS+UC LocalRegServerPo
or UC2.0 rt
network Location: Device >
environment, you ComCfg > Phone >
do not need to Server
specify the port Setting:
number. The
value is l PrimaryRegSer
automatically verPort: Set this
pushed by the parameter to the
AA server. port number of
the active SIP
l In an IMS server.
network
environment, this l BackupRegServ
parameter is set erPort: Set this
by the parameter to the
administrator. port number of
the standby SIP
l In a UC2.X, server.
EC6.X or CC
network l BackupRegServ
environment, use er2Port: Set this
the default value parameter to the
5060. However, port number of
if 5060 is used standby SIP
for SIP signaling server 2.
transmission, set l BackupRegServ
the port number er3Port: Set this
of the SIP server parameter to the
to 5061. port number of
l In a third-party standby SIP
SIP network server 3.
environment, set l LocalRegServer
this parameter to Port: Set this
the port number parameter to the
of the third-party port number of
SIP server in use. the local SIP
server.
Example:
PrimaryRegServer-
Port="5060"


the Configuration
File
Proxy Server Indicates the address In an EC6.X Parameters:

of the proxy server. network CallOutProxySer-
The IP phone environment, enter verAddress,
registers with the the signaling IP CallOutBackupSer
proxy server with address of the verAddress, and
preference. If the CloudUSM. CallOutLocalSer-
proxy server address In an IMS+UC or verAddress
you have specified is UC2.0 network Location: Device >
incorrect, the IP environment, the ComCfg > Phone >
phone will continue value is Server
its attempt to automatically Setting:
register with this pushed by the AA
incorrect address server. l CallOutProxySe
and does not register rverAddress:
In an IMS network Set this
with the SIP server. environment, this
This will cause a parameter to the
parameter is set by address of the
registration failure. the administrator. active proxy
When the server server.
switches to Server 4
l CallOutBackup
or Server 5, is ServerAddress:
displayed in the Set this
status bar of the parameter to the
phone. address of the
standby proxy
server.
l CallOutProxySe
rver2Address:
Set this
parameter to the
address of
standby proxy
server 2.
l CallOutProxySe
rver3Address:
Set this
parameter to the
address of
standby proxy
server 3.
l CallOutLocalSe
rverAddress:
Set this
parameter to the
address of the
local proxy
server.


the Configuration
File
Example:
CallOutProxySer-
verAddress="192.16
8.1.10"


the Configuration
File
Proxy Server Port Indicates the port In an IMS+UC or Parameters:

number of the proxy UC2.0 network CallOutProxySer-
server. environment, the verPort,
value is CallOutBackupSer
automatically verPort, and
pushed by the AA CallOutLocalSer-
server. verPort
In an IMS network Location: Device >
environment, this ComCfg > Phone >
parameter is set by Server
the administrator. Setting:
l CallOutProxySe
rverPort: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of the active
proxy server.
l CallOutBackup
ServerPort: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of the standby
proxy server.
l CallOutProxySe
rver2Port: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of standby proxy
server 2.
l CallOutProxySe
rver3Port: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of standby proxy
server 3.
l CallOutLocalSe
rverPort: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of the local
proxy server.
Example:
CallOutProxySer-
verPort="5060"


the Configuration
File
uPortal Server l For an office l For an office Parameters:

(supported only in with the DNS with the DNS UPortalServerAd-
the EC6.X network) server: server: dress
Indicates the Enter the domain Location: Device >
domain name of name of the ComCfg > Phone >
the authentication Server
authentication server as
server. required. Setting:
l For an office l For an office l For an office

without the DNS without the DNS with the DNS
server: server: server:
Indicates the IP Enter multiple IP UPortalServerA
address of the addresses as ddress: Set this
authentication required. parameter to the
server. Separate each domain name of
two using a the active uPortal
comma (,). server.
Example:
UPortalServerAd
dress="uportal.co
m"
l For an office
without the DNS
server:
UPortalServerA
ddress: Set this
parameter to the
IP addresses of
the uPortal
servers.
Example:
UPortalServerAd
dress="192.168.1
.
10,192.168.1.20"
NOTE
The uPortal
server supports
HTTPS by
default.


the Configuration
File
uPortal Server Port Indicates the port Set this parameter to Parameters:
(supported only in number of the the port number of UPortalServerPort
the EC6.X network) uPortal server. the uPortal server. Location: Device >
Default value: 80 ComCfg > Phone >
Server
Setting:
UPortalServerPort:
Set this parameter to
the port number of
the active uPortal
server.
Example:
UPortalServerPort="
443"
The VFOneNet network environment supports multiple modes for configuring SIP server and
proxy server addresses, as described in Table 5-37.
Table 5-37 SIP server and proxy server redundancy scenarios

Scenario SIP Server Proxy Remark
Server
1 IP (5) - Enter five SIP server IP addresses and leave

the proxy server address empty.
2 Domain (1) - Enter a SIP server domain and leave the

proxy server address empty.
You can enter a domain name for the first
SIP server. The SIP server domain name
supports SRV/A resolution. A maximum of
five IP addresses can be resolved, which
correspond to SIP server IP1 to IP5.
3 Domain (1) Domain (1) Enter a SIP server domain name and a proxy
server domain name.
In this scenario, the SIP server domain name
does not support SRV/A resolution, and only
the proxy server domain name can be
resolved.
You can enter one proxy server domain
name. A maximum of five IP addresses can
be resolved. The system does not support
mixing of domain names and IP addresses.

Scenario SIP Server Proxy Remark

Server
4 IP (1) Domain (1) Enter a SIP server IP address and a proxy

server domain name.
You can enter one proxy server domain
name. The system does not support mixing
of domain names and IP addresses.

Administrator Guide 6 System Configuration
6 System Configuration
This chapter describes how to set the system parameters for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.
6.1 Web Page Access

This section describes how to access the phone web page as an administrator.
Web Page Compatibility

The IP phone web management system supports the operating systems and web browsers
listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Supported operating systems and web browsers
Item Details
Operating system l Windows XP

l Windows7 32-bit
l Windows7 64-bit
l Windows8 32-bit
l Windows8 64-bit
l Windows10 32-bit
l Windows10 64-bit
Web browser l IE8

l IE9
l IE10
l IE11
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the IP address of the IP phone.

l On the phone login screen, choose More > Network > Status > Network and view the
phone's IP address.
l On the phone home screen, choose Apps > Status > Network and view the phone's IP
address.
Step 2 Open a web browser and enter the phone's IP address in the address box.
Step 3 Enter the administrator account and password, and click Log In.
l The default administrator account is admin, and the default administrator password is admin123. To
ensure security, change the administrator password at your first login. For more information, see
6.4.4 Admin Password Change.
l If you enter the password incorrectly for three consecutive times, the IP address of the PC or
terminal you are using will be denied to access the IP phone. To continue to access the IP phone, you
can change the IP address of the PC (a maximum of ten IP addresses are supported). However, if the
IP address has been changed for ten times and is still denied to access the IP phone, the IP phone
will be locked, denying any IP address to access it. In this case, to access the IP phone, you need to
wait five minutes until the IP phone is unlocked.
----End
6.2 Advanced Screen Access

This section describes how to access the phone's Advanced screen as an administrator for
advanced settings.
Procedure
Step 1 On the phone's home screen, choose Apps > Advanced. The system prompts you to enter the
password.
Step 2 Enter the administrator password and press the OK softkey.
l The default administrator account is admin, and the default administrator password is admin123. To
ensure security, select Admin Password and change the administrator password at your first access
to the Advanced screen.
l To ensure your administrator account security, change the password periodically. Ensure that the
password meets the complexity requirements.
l Phone backup and reset involve personal data. When performing these operations, comply with local
laws and regulations, and take sufficient measures to protect personal data.
----End
6.3 System Settings

This section describes how to set basic phone system parameters, including the time, date.
6.3.1 Date and Time

This section describes how to set the date and time, including their update mode, server
address, and display format.

Setting Parameters on the Web Page

Step 1 Access the phone web page as an administrator. For details, see 6.1 Web Page Access.
Step 2 Choose System > Date and Time.

The Date and Time page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Date and Time
Step 3 Set parameters (see Table 6-2 for detailed parameter descriptions).

the Configuration
File
Time Update Mode Indicates the time - Parameter:

update mode. Two ENABLEUPDATE
options are TIME
available: Location: Device >
l Automatic: The ComCfg > Access >
IP phone Sntp
automatically Value: 0 or 1
time-
synchronizes l 0: manual mode
with the NTP l 1: automatic
server. mode
l Manual: You Example:
need to manually ENABLEUPDATET
set System IME="1"
Time.


the Configuration
File
Time Zone Indicates the actual Select the time zone Parameter: TZONE
time zone. A time according to the Location: Device >
zone is a region that area. ComCfg > Access >
has a uniform Sntp
standard time. To
avoid time chaos, Value: time zone
the world has been name; default value:
divided into 24 time Beijing, Chongqing,
zones. Hong Kong, and
Urumqi
Time Server Indicates the address Enter the IP address Parameter: URL
Address 1 of the active NTP or domain name of Location: Device >
server. When the active NTP ComCfg > Access >
connected to the server when Time Sntp
active NTP server, Update Mode is set
the IP phone time- to Automatic. Example:
synchronizes with URL="192.168.1.11
the active NTP "
server.
Time Server Indicates the address Enter the IP address Parameter:

Address 2 of the standby NTP or domain name of BACKURL
server. Once the IP the standby NTP Location: Device >
phone loses its server. ComCfg > Access >
connection to the Sntp
active NTP server, it
sends a connection Example:
request to the BACKURL="192.1
standby NTP server. 68.1.12"
When connected to
the standby NTP
server, the IP phone
time-synchronizes
with the standby
NTP server.
Update Interval(s) Indicates the interval Value range: Parameter:

for the IP phone to 300-604800 SYNCTIME
send a connection Unit: second Location: Device >
request to the NTP ComCfg > Access >
server. Default: 7200
Sntp
Unit: second
Example:
SYNCTIME="7200
"
----End

Setting Parameters on the LCD Screen

Step 1 On the home screen, choose Apps > System > Date and Time > Time Server.
Step 2 Set the address and update interval of the time server (see Table 6-2 for detailed parameter
descriptions).
----End
Configuring the NTP Server Address Using Option 42

The IP phone can obtain the IP address of the NTP server through the DHCP Option 42 field.
If a DHCP server installed on the Windows 2008 Server is used, set String value in the
Option 42 field to NTP.address=https://NTP server address, for example,
NTP.address=https://192.168.1.222. For details, see 8.3.4 Setting Option 246 Parameters.
6.3.2 Language
This section describes how to import a local language package file to enhance the phone's
support for languages.
Step 2 Choose System > Language.

The Language page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Language


the Configuration
File
Import Local Allows you to For details about -

Language Package import your own how to make a
language package language package
file if the language file, see the eSpace
you want is not one 7910 and 7950 IP
of the phone's Phone Language
default languages. Package
The language Customization
package file to Guide.
import can be NOTE
Norwegian, For information
about how to obtain
Swedish, Dutch,
the document, see 3.1
Latin, Italian, Obtaining
German, Albanian, Reference
Basque, Breton, Documents.
Catalan, Danish,
Faroese, Frisian,
Galician, Greenland,
Icelandic, Irish
Gaelic,
Luxembourgish,
Rhaeto-Romance
language, and
Scottish Gaelic.
NOTE
The file name cannot
contain such
characters as ; / ? : @
# ' & = + $ ,.
----End
6.4 Advanced Settings

This section describes how to configure information related to the phone's network
environment, including servers and service rights.
6.4.1 Network
This section describes how to set network access parameters including access authentication,
access mode, and network security.


Step 2 Choose Advanced > Network.


Modify the
Configuration
File
Access 802.1x 802.1x is a Enable or Parameters:

Authentication protocol for disable 802.1x ENABLEDOT
port-based based on 1X,
network access requirements. USERNAME,
control. It NOTE and
authenticates PASSWORD
l To ensure
and controls network Location:
devices that access Device >
attempt to security, it ComCfg >
connect to a is
Access > Dot1x
LAN. recommend
ed that you Setting:
l If a device enable
connected to 802.1x. Ask
l ENABLED
an 802.1x- your OT1X
enabled port network indicates
on the administrato whether to
r for the enable
switch is user name
authenticate 802.1x, with
and
d, the device password
two options
can access for 802.1x 0 (disable)
resources on authenticati and 1
the LAN. on. (enable). Set
l When a this
l If the phone parameter
authenticatio connects to based on
n fails, the the Huawei requirement
device public s.
cannot cloud, the
access 802.1x l USERNAM
resources on
authenticati E indicates
on is not the user
the LAN. supported.
name for
Default: Enable 802.1x
Unsolicited authenticatio
Authentication n. Set this
Interval: parameter to
indicates the the user
interval for the name that
IP phone to you have
proactively obtained
initiate from your
authentication network
after successful administrato
802.1x MD5 r.
authentication, l PASSWOR
which is used D indicates
mapping 802.1x


Modify the
Configuration
File
MD5 the
authentication. password
If this for 802.1x
parameter is set authenticatio
to 0, n. Set this
authentication parameter to
is not the
proactively password
initiated. that you
Default value: 0 have
obtained
from your
network
administrato
r.
Example:
ENABLEDOT1
X="1",
USERNAME="
admin", and
PASSWORD="
Huawei@12345
6"
Parameters:
AuthMode
Location:
Device >
ComCfg >
AssociateSipD
ot1x
Setting:
AuthMode
indicates the
authentication
method for
802.1x
authentication.
Value: 0, 1, or 2
l 0: EAP-
MD5
l 1: EAP-TLS
l 2:
Automatic
Default: 1


Modify the
Configuration
File
Network SRTP Indicates the l To ensure Parameter:

Security media stream communicat encryptSRTP
encryption ion security, Location:
mode. it is Device >
l Mandatory: recommende ComCfg >
encrypts d that you NetworkSafe
media select
Mandatory. Value: 0, 1, or 2
streams.
l When some l 0: disable
l Optional:
encrypts peer IP l 1: optional
media phones do l 2:
streams not support mandatory
when SRTP-based
encryption Example:
Mandatory encryptSRTP="
or Optional but need to
have media 2"
is selected
for the peer stream
IP phone, exchanged
and does not with the IP
encrypt phone,
media select
streams Optional.
when l If you select
Disable is Disable, all
selected for media data
the peer IP is
phone. transmitted
l Disable: in plain text
does not over the IP
encrypt network.
media Default:
streams. Disable


Modify the
Configuration
File
SIP Transport Indicates the Set this Parameter:

transmission parameter based TransferMode
mode of SIP on Location:
signaling. Three requirements. Device >
options are NOTE ComCfg >
available: Phone > Sip
l To ensure
l UDP: communicat Value: 0, 1, or 2
transaction- ion security,
oriented, it is l 0: UDP
simple, and recommend l 1: TLS
ed that you
unreliable select TLS. l 2: TCP
transmission From
mode Example:
V200R003
C30SPC700 TransferMode=
l TLS: "1"
, SIP
cryptographi transmissio
c and secure n supports
transmission the TLS1.2
mode to protocol.
ensure l When SIP
confidentiali Transport
ty and is set to
message TLS, you
need to
integrity
configure
l TCP: the time
connection- server or
oriented and manually
set the time
reliable to the
transmission current time
mode to prevent
IP phone
registration
failure.
Before using
TLS, ensure
that:
l The server
supports
TLS.
l You have
imported the
TLS client
root
certificate to
the IP phone
and have
selected the


Modify the
Configuration
File
imported
certificate
from the
TLS
Certificate
Issuer drop-
down list
box. For
details about
how to
import a
certificate,
see 5.6
Multi-
Certificate
Support.
l You have set
the correct
server port.
In a UC2.X
or EC6.X
network
environment
, the port
number is
5061. In an
IMS+UC
network
environment
, the port
number is
automaticall
y pushed by
the AA
server, so
you do not
need to
manually
configure
the port
number. For
details, see
6.4.3
Server.
l The phone's
system time


Modify the
Configuration
File
is within the
validity
period of the
imported
certificate.
l The phone
does not
connect to
the Huawei
public
cloud.
Default: UDP


Modify the
Configuration
File
WEB Indicates the l HTTP is a Parameter:

mode for protocol to encryptVisitW
accessing the IP transmit eb
phone using the data in plain Location:
web page. text. Device >
l Disable: Therefore, if ComCfg >
Web access you use NetworkSafe
is disabled. HTTP,
ensure that Value: 0, 1 or 2
l HTTP: The your l 0: disables
web browser network is a web access.
interacts trusted one.
with the IP l 1: uses
phone using l Before using HTTP for
HTTP. HTTPS, web access.
When you import the l 2: uses
select required HTTPS for
HTTPS, the certificate. web access.
web browser For details
about how Example:
automaticall encryptVisitWe
y changes its to import a
certificate, b="2"
web access
mode to see 5.6
HTTPS Multi-
even if you Certificate
log in to the Support.
phone web Default:
page using HTTPS
HTTP.
l HTTPS:
The web
browser
interacts
with the IP
phone using
HTTPS,
which
ensures user
information
security.


Modify the
Configuration
File
TLS1.0 Indicates TLS Set this Parameter:

1.0. parameter based enableTLS10
on Location:
requirements. Device >
NOTE ComCfg >
l This NetworkSafe
configuratio
Value: 0 or 1
n item is
available on l 0: disable
the
Advanced
l 1: enable
> Network Example:
> Security enableTLS10="
screen of 0"
the phone
LCD, not on
the phone
web page.
l TLS1.0 has
security
risks. To
ensure
communicat
ion security,
it is
recommend
ed that you
disable
TLS1.0 and
use TLS of
a later
version.
Default:
Disable


Modify the
Configuration
File
TLS Encryption - The default Parameter:

Mode (available value is Safe. enableTLSEnh
in Broadsoft, Default: Safe ancedEncrypti
Asterisk and onSet
other network Location:
environments) Device >
ComCfg >
NetworkSafe
Value: 0 or 1
l 0:
Compatible
l 1: Safe
Example:
enableTLSEnha
ncedEncryption
Set="1"
LLDP-MED LLDP-MED Indicates l If you select Parameter:

whether to Enable, the Enable
enable LLDP phone's Location:
packet sending LAN port Device >
on the phone's sends LLDP ComCfg >
LAN port. packets. Access >
LLDP enables a NOTE LLDP
device to store eSpace 7910/
eSpace 7950 Value: 0 or 1
and manage
can only send l 0: disable
information LLDP packets.
about the It does not l 1: enable
device itself process its Example:
and directly- received LLDP
Enable="1"
connected packets.
neighbors for l If you select
the network Disable, the
management phone's
system to check LAN port
the link does not
communication send LLDP
status. packets.
Default: Enable


Modify the
Configuration
File
Packet Sending Indicates the Value range: Parameter:

Interval interval for 1-3600, in unit Interval
sending an of seconds Location:
LLDP packet. Default: 120 Device >
ComCfg >
Access >
LLDP
Example:
Interval="120"
VLAN LAN Port Indicates Set this Parameter:

whether to parameter based Enable
enable the on Location:
VLAN function requirements. Device >
for the phone's Default: Enable ComCfg >
LAN port. Access > Qos
If you select Value: 0 or 1
Enable, the
VLAN function l 0: disable
is enabled for l 1: enable
the phone's Example:
LAN port. Enable="1"


Modify the
Configuration
File
ID Indicates the Set this Parameter:

VLAN ID of parameter to the VlanId
the phone's ID of the Location:
LAN port. After VLAN to which Device >
LAN port is the IP phone ComCfg >
enabled, the belongs. Access > Qos
data packets Value range:
sent by the IP Example:
0-4094 VlanId="95"
phone carry
VLAN tags. Default: 0
NOTE
The network
administrator l The VLAN
ID for the
divides the
LAN port
network must be
connected to different
the switch into from that
multiple for the PC
VLANs. Each port;
otherwise,
VLAN has a
network
VLAN ID. exceptions
occur.
l When
LLDP is
enabled in
the
environmen
t where the
VLAN is
configured,
the IP
phone
preferentiall
y uses the
VLAN ID
obtained in
LLDP
mode. The
VLAN
configured
on the web
page or
delivered by
the NMS
does not
take effect.


Modify the
Configuration
File
Priority Indicates the Set this Parameter:

VLAN priority parameter based Level2Priority
of the phone's on Location:
LAN port. requirements. A Device >
large value ComCfg >
indicates a high Access > Qos
priority.
Example:
Value range: Level2Priority=
0-7 "6"
Default: 6
PC Port Indicates Set this Parameter:

whether to parameter based EnablePCPort
enable the on Location:
VLAN function requirements. Device >
for the PC port Default: ComCfg >
on an IP phone. Disable Access >
If you select PCVlan
Enable the Value: 0 or 1
VLAN function
is enabled for l 0: disable
the PC port. l 1: enable
Example:
EnablePCPort=
"1"


Modify the
Configuration
File

VLAN ID of parameter to the VlanId
the phone's PC ID of the Location:
port. VLAN to which Device >
l This VLAN the IP phone ComCfg >
ID is carried belongs. Access >
by data Value range: PCVlan
packets 0-4094 Example:
transmitted Default: 0 VlanIdPCPort=
upstream "5"
through the
PC port.
l For data
packets
transmitted
downstream
through the
PC port, if
the VLAN
ID in the
data packets
is the same
as the
VLAN ID of
the PC port,
the PC port
removes the
VLAN tag
from the
data packets
before
transmitting
them. If the
VLAN ID in
the data
packets is
different
from the
VLAN ID of
the PC port,
the PC port
discards
these data
packets.


Modify the
Configuration
File
Priority Indicates the Set this Parameter:

VLAN priority parameter based Level2PriorityP
of the phone's on CPort
PC port. requirements. A Location:
large value Device >
indicates a high ComCfg >
priority. Access >
Value range: PCVlan
0-7 Example:
Default: 0 Level2PriorityP
CPort="3"


Modify the
Configuration
File
VLAN Filtering Indicates Set this Parameter:

on PC Port whether to parameter based EnablePCPort
enable the data on Location:
filtering requirements. Device >
function for the Default: ComCfg >
phone's PC Disable Access >
port. If you PCQos
select Enable,
the phone's PC Value: 0 or 1
port allows the l 0: disable
following data l 1: enable
packets to pass
through: data Example:
packets that do EnablePCPort=
not carry any "1"
VLAN ID, data
packets
carrying the
VLAN ID of
the LAN port,
and data
packets
carrying the
VLAN ID that
is set below
VLAN
Filtering on
PC Port. If you
select Disable,
the phone's PC
port allows only
packets without
any VLAN ID
or with the
VLAN ID of
the LAN port to
pass through.


Modify the
Configuration
File

VLAN ID, with parameter based VlanIdPCPort
which packets on Location:
are allowed to requirements. Device >
pass through Value range: ComCfg >
the phone's PC 0-4094 Access >
port. When PCQos
VLAN Default: 0
Filtering on Example:
PC Port is set VlanIdPCPort=
to Enable, the "96"
phone's PC port
allows the
following data
packets to pass
through: data
packets that do
not carry any
VLAN ID, data
packets
carrying the
VLAN ID of
the LAN port,
and data
packets
carrying the
VLAN ID that
is set here.


Modify the
Configuration
File
DSCP DSCP Indicates Default: Parameter:

whether to Disable Enable
enable NOTE Location:
Differentiated When the voice Device >
Services Code VLAN
ComCfg >
Point (DSCP). capability is
enabled on the Access > Dscp
DSCP occupies
switch, the IP Value: 0 or 1
the most phone can
significant six obtain the l 0: disable
bits in the Type DSCP value l 1: enable
of Service through LLDP.
(TOS) field to When setting Example:
differentiate parameters on Enable="1"
the web page or
between using the NMS
services. to deliver
parameters,
ensure that the
DSCP value is
the same as that
on the switch.
RTP Indicates the Set this Parameter:

voice DSCP parameter based AUDIODSCP
value. on Location:
Value range: ComCfg >
0-63 Access > Dscp
Default: 46 Example:
AUDIODSCP=
"46"
STP Indicates the Set this Parameter:

signaling DSCP parameter based SIGNALDSCP
value. on Location:
Value range: ComCfg >
0-63 Access > Dscp
SIGNALDSCP
="46"


Modify the
Configuration
File
Network Port LAN Port Indicates the Select a value Parameter:

Link Mode working mode based on your InternetMode
of the phone's network Location:
LAN port. conditions. Device >
Default: Auto- ComCfg >
negotiation Negotiate
Value range:
0-6
l 0: auto-
negotiation
l 1: 10 Mbit/s
full-duplex
l 2: 10 Mbit/s
half-duplex
l 3: 100
Mbit/s full-
duplex
l 4: 100
Mbit/s half-
duplex
l 5: 1000
Mbit/s full-
duplex
l 6: 100
Mbit/s
adaptive
Example:
InternetMode="
0"


Modify the
Configuration
File
PC Port Indicates the Select a value Parameter:

working mode based on your PCMode
of the phone's network Location:
PC port. conditions. Device >
Default: Auto- ComCfg >
negotiation Negotiate
Value range:
0-6
l 0: auto-
negotiation
l 1: 10 Mbit/s
full-duplex
l 2: 10 Mbit/s
half-duplex
l 3: 100
Mbit/s full-
duplex
l 4: 100
Mbit/s half-
duplex
l 5: 1000
Mbit/s full-
duplex
l 6: 100
Mbit/s
adaptive
Example:
PCMode="0"


Modify the
Configuration
File
Automatic rate Automatically Set this Parameter:

adjustment selects the parameter based AutoAdjust
optimal on Location:
network mode. requirements. Device >
If you select Default: ComCfg >
Enable, the IP Disable Negotiate
phone NOTE Value: 0 or 1
automatically When automatic
selects the rate adjustment l 0: disable
optimal is enabled, the l 1: enable
IP phone
network mode. Example:
automatically
selects the AutoAdjust="0
optimal network "
mode, and users
do not need to
manually set the
rates of the
LAN port and
PC port.
When automatic
rate adjustment
is disabled, it's
recommended
that setting the
value of LAN
port identical to
PC port.


Modify the
Configuration
File
IPv4 Network Access Mode Indicates the Select a value Parameter:

IPv4 network based on your ACCESSMOD
access mode of network E
the IP phone, conditions. Location:
with three Default: DHCP Device >
options ComCfg >
available: Fixed Access
IP Address,
DHCP, and Value range: 0,
PPPoE. 1, or 2
l If you select l 0: fixed IP

Fixed IP address
Address, fill l 1: DHCP
out the IP l 2: PPPoE
address,
subnet Example:
mask, ACCESSMOD
gateway E="1"
address,
active DNS
server
address, and
standby
DNS server
address.
l If you select
DHCP, the
IP phone
automaticall
y obtains an
IP address
from the
DHCP
server. You
can still
choose to
manually
enter the
DNS server
address or
enable the
IP phone to
automaticall
y obtain a
DNS server
address.


Modify the
Configuration
File
NOTE
l Auto DNS
Server: The
IP phone
automaticall
y obtains a
DNS server
address
from the
DHCP
server.
l Manually
obtain the
DNS
address:
You need to
manually
enter the
active and
standby
DNS server
addresses.
l If you select
PPPoE,
enter the
user name
and
password
for PPPoE
dialup.


Modify the
Configuration
File
IPv6 Network Access Mode Indicates the Select a value Parameter:

IPv6 network based on your ACCESSMOD
access mode of network EIPV6
the IP phone, conditions. Location:
with three Default: DHCP Device >
options ComCfg >
available: Fixed Access
IP Address,
DHCP, and Value range: 0,
PPPoE. 1, or 2
l 0: fixed IP
l If you select
address
Fixed IP
Address, fill l 1: DHCP
out the IP l 2: PPPoE
address,
Example:
subnet
ACCESSMOD
mask, prefix
EIPV6="0"
length,
gateway
address,
active DNS
server
address, and
standby
DNS server
address.
l If you select
DHCP, the
IP phone
automaticall
y obtains an
IP address
from the
DHCP
server. You
can still
choose to
manually
enter the
DNS server
address or
enable the
IP phone to
automaticall
y obtain a
DNS server
address.


Modify the
Configuration
File
NOTE
l Auto DNS
Server: The
IP phone
automaticall
y obtains a
DNS server
address
from the
DHCP
server.
l Manually
obtain the
DNS
address:
You need to
manually
enter the
active and
standby
DNS server
addresses.
l If you select
PPPoE,
enter the
user name
and
password
for PPPoE
dialup.
----End
Setting Parameters on the LCD Screen

Step 1 Choose Advanced > Network on the LCD screen as an administrator. For details, see section
6.2 Advanced Screen Access.
Step 2 Set parameters listed in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 Network parameters on the LCD screen

Access 802.1x 802.1x is a protocol for port- Enable or disable 802.1x based
Authen based network access control. on requirements.
tication It authenticates and controls NOTE
devices that attempt to connect l To ensure network access
to a LAN. security, it is recommended that
l If a device connected to an you enable 802.1x. Ask your
network administrator for the
802.1x-enabled port on the
user name and password for
switch is authenticated, the 802.1x authentication.
device can access resources
l When a phone connects to the
on the LAN. Huawei public cloud, the 802.1x
l If the authentication fails, authentication is not supported.
the device cannot access Default: Enable
resources on the LAN.
You can set the authentication
mode after 802.1x authentication
is enabled.
The authentication modes are
EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, and
Auto.
Default value: EAP-TLS
LLDP- Indicates whether to enable l If you select Enable, the

MED LLDP packet sending on the phone's LAN port sends
phone's LAN port. LLDP packets.
LLDP enables a device to store NOTE
and manage information about eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 can only
send LLDP packets. It does not
the device itself and directly-
process its received LLDP packets.
connected neighbors for the
network management system l If you select Disable, the
to check the link phone's LAN port does not
communication status. send LLDP packets.
Default: Enable

VLAN Indicates whether to enable the Set this parameter based on

VLAN function for the phone's requirements.
LAN port. Default: Enable
If you select Enable, the After you select Enable, you can
VLAN function is enabled for set VLAN ID and VLAN
the phone's LAN port. Priority.
l VLAN ID l VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID of Set this parameter to the ID of
the phone's LAN port. the VLAN to which the IP
After LAN port is enabled, phone belongs.
the data packets sent by the
IP phone carry VLAN tags. Value range: 0-4094
The network administrator Default: 0

divides the network l VLAN Priority
connected to the switch into Set this parameter based on
multiple VLANs. Each requirements. A large value
VLAN has a VLAN ID. indicates a high priority.
NOTE Value range: 0-7
– The VLAN ID for the Default: 6
LAN port must be
different from that for the
PC port; otherwise,
network exceptions occur.
– When LLDP is enabled in
the environment where
the VLAN is configured,
the VLAN value obtained
using LLDP takes
precedence over the
VLAN value configured
in the configuration file.
When the IP phone
switches to an
environment where no
VLAN is configured, the
VLAN value in the
configuration file is used.
l VLAN Priority
Indicates the VLAN
priority of the phone's LAN
port.

Securit SRTP Indicates the media stream l To ensure communication

y encryption mode. security, it is recommended
l Mandatory: encrypts that you select Mandatory.
media streams. l When some peer IP phones do
l Optional: encrypts media not support SRTP-based
streams when Mandatory encryption but need to have
or Optional is selected for media stream exchanged with
the peer IP phone, and does the IP phone, select Optional.
not encrypt media streams l If you select Disable, all
when Disable is selected media data is transmitted in
for the peer IP phone. plain text over the IP network.
l Disable: does not encrypt Default: Disable
media streams.

SIP Indicates the transmission Set this parameter based on

Transport mode of SIP signaling. Three requirements.
options are available: NOTE
l UDP: transaction-oriented, l To ensure communication
simple, and unreliable security, it is recommended that
transmission mode you select TLS.
l When SIP Transport is set to
l TLS: cryptographic and
TLS, you need to configure the
secure transmission mode time server or manually set the
to ensure confidentiality time to the current time to
and message integrity prevent IP phone registration
failure.
l TCP: connection-oriented
and reliable transmission Before using TLS, ensure that:
mode l The server supports TLS.
l You have imported the TLS
client root certificate to the IP
phone and have selected the
imported certificate from the
TLS Certificate Issuer drop-
down list box. For details
about how to import a
certificate, see 5.6 Multi-
Certificate Support.
l You have set the correct server
port. In a UC2.X or EC6.X
network environment, the port
number is 5061. In a IMS+UC
network environment, the port
number is automatically
pushed by the AA server, so
you do not need to manually
configure the port number. For
details, see 6.4.3 Server.
l The phone's system time is
within the validity period of
the imported certificate.
l The phone does not connect to
the Huawei public cloud.
Default: UDP

WEB Indicates the mode for l HTTP is a protocol to transmit

accessing the IP phone using data in plain text. Therefore, if
the web page. you use HTTP, ensure that
l Disable: Web access is your network is a trusted one.
disabled. l Before using HTTPS, import
l HTTP: The web browser the required certificate. For
interacts with the IP phone details about how to import a
using HTTP. When you certificate, see 5.6 Multi-
select HTTPS, the web Certificate Support.
browser automatically Default: HTTPS
changes its web access
mode to HTTPS even if
you log in to the phone web
page using HTTP.
l HTTPS: The web browser
interacts with the IP phone
using HTTPS, which
ensures user information
security.
TLS1.0 Indicates TLS 1.0. Set this parameter based on

requirements.
NOTE
TLS1.0 has security risks. To ensure
communication security, it is
recommended that you disable
TLS1.0 and use TLS of a later
version.
Default: Disable

Ethernet IPv4 Indicates the IPv4 network Select a value based on your
Settings access mode of the IP phone, network conditions.
with three options available: Default: DHCP
DHCP, Static and PPPoE.
l If you select Static, fill out
the IP address, subnet
mask, gateway address,
active DNS server address,
and standby DNS server
address.
l If you select DHCP, the IP
phone automatically
obtains an IP address from
the DHCP server. You can
still choose to manually
enter the DNS server
address or enable the IP
phone to automatically
obtain a DNS server
address.
NOTE
l Auto DNS Server: The IP
phone automatically obtains a
DNS server address from the
DHCP server.
l Manually obtain the DNS
address: You need to
manually enter the active and
standby DNS server
addresses.
l If you select PPPoE, enter
the user name and
password for PPPoE dialup.

Ethernet IPv6 Indicates the IPv6 network Select a value based on your
Settings access mode of the IP phone, network conditions.
with three options available: Default: DHCP
DHCP, Static, and PPPoE.
l If you select Static, fill out
the IP address, subnet
mask, prefix length,
gateway address, active
DNS server address, and
standby DNS server
address.
l If you select DHCP, the IP
phone automatically
obtains an IP address from
the DHCP server. You can
still choose to manually
enter the DNS server
address or enable the IP
phone to automatically
obtain a DNS server
address.
NOTE
l Auto DNS Server: The IP
phone automatically obtains a
DNS server address from the
DHCP server.
l Manually obtain the DNS
address: You need to
manually enter the active and
standby DNS server
addresses.
l If you select PPPoE, enter
the user name and
password for PPPoE dialup.
----End
6.4.2 Account
This section describes how to register an account and configure line match on the IP phone.
Prerequisites
The account has been allocated on the server.

l In the EC6.X network environment, if Login Mode is set to Account, account information cannot
be configured on the web account page or LCD account page.
l During network environment switching, if the server information has been configured for an
account, you need to switch the login mode to phone number and delete the server information
configured for the account to avoid authentication failure. If the IP phones are connected to the
network management system, server information for accounts in batches can be configured using the
network management system.

Step 1 Access the phone web page as an administrator. For details, see Web Page Access.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Account.

The page shown in Figure 6-3 is displayed.
Figure 6-3 Account page
Step 3 Click Add Account.


Figure 6-4 Add Account page
Step 4 Set the account parameters listed in Table 6-6.

Table 6-6 Parameters for adding an account

the Configuration
File
Account Indicates the ID Ask the SIP server Parameter: Account

used for an account administrator for an Location: Device >
to register with the account or directly UserCfg > Account1
SIP server. The SIP log in to the SIP
NOTE
server uses this ID server to configure Account1 indicates
to identify the an account as the the first account,
account. When you administrator. Account2 indicates
dial a long number NOTE the second account,
(country code+area The phone's first and so on.
code+short account can be edited Example:
number), the short but cannot be Account="47002"
deleted.
number is displayed
on the dialing
screen. When you
place a call using a
short number, the IP
phone obtains the
country code and
area code of this
short number from
the AA server to
route the call and
query the directory.
NOTE
eSpace 7910
supports a maximum
of three accounts,
while eSpace 7950
supports a maximum
of six.
Password Indicates the Ask the SIP server Parameter: Passwd

password used to administrator for a Location: Device >
register an account password or directly UserCfg > Account1
with the SIP server. log in to the SIP > Auth
server to configure a
password as the Example:
administrator. Passwd="admin1234
56"


the Configuration
File
User Name Indicates the user l In a UC1.1, Parameter:

name, which is UC2.X, IMS, or UserName
provided by the third-party Location: Device >
Voice over IP (VoIP) network UserCfg > Account1
service provider. environment, set > Auth
this parameter
based on Example:
requirements. UserName="47002@
example.com"
l In an IMS+UC
network
environment, set
this parameter to
the value (in
format of
Account@Domai
n name)
specified on the
SIP server.
l In an EC6.X
network
environment, set
this parameter in
format of
Account@Domai
n name
Label Name Indicates the name In an IMS+UC Parameter:

of an account network LabelName
displayed on a line environment, the Location: Device >
button of the IP value is UserCfg > Account1
phone. automatically
pushed by the AA Example:
(supported only by LabelName="47002"
eSpace 7950) server.
NOTE
After you set the
label name, the IP
phone automatically
synchronizes it to the
server. If
Displayname is
enabled on the
server, the label
name will be
displayed on the
incoming call
notification screen of
the called party's
phone if a call is
placed using this
account.


the Configuration
File
SIP Server Indicates the SIP Enter the SIP server Parameters:
server address. address based on PrimaryRegServer-
Different SIP server your actual network Address,
addresses can be environment. BackupRegServer-
specified for l In an EC6.X Address, and
different accounts. network LocalRegServerAd-
If this parameter is environment, the dress
left empty, the SIP SIP server is the Location: Device >
server with which CloudUSM ComCfg > Phone >
the IP phone server. Enter the Server
registers is used. domain name of Setting:
NOTE the CloudUSM
server. l PrimaryRegServ
Server 1, Server 2,
Server 3, Server 4, erAddress: Set
l In a UC2.X this parameter to
and Server 5
represent the active network the address of the
SIP server, standby environment, the active SIP server.
SIP server, standby SIP server is a
SIP server 2, standby gateway of the l BackupRegServe
SIP server 3, and eSpace U1900 rAddress: Set
local SIP server
series. this parameter to
respectively. the address of the
When the server l In an IMS+UC standby SIP
switches to Server 3, network server.
Server 4 or Server environment, the
AA server l LocalRegServer
5, is displayed automatically Address: Set this
in the status bar of
pushes an IP parameter to the
the phone. address of the
address to the IP
phone. local SIP server.
l In a CC network Example:
environment, the PrimaryRegServer-
SIP server is a Address="192.168.1.
gateway of the 9"
eSpace U2900
series, a
UAP3300, or a
Session Border
Controller
(SBC).
l In a third-party
SIP server
network
environment, the
SIP server is a
third-party SIP
server.


the Configuration
File
Proxy Server Indicates the l In an EC6.X Parameters:

address of the proxy network CallOutProxySer-
server. Different environment, verAddress,
proxy server enter the CallOutBackupSer-
addresses can be signaling IP verAddress, and
specified for address of the CallOutLocalSer-
different accounts. CloudUSM. verAddress
If this parameter is l In an IMS+UC Location: Device >
left empty, the proxy network ComCfg > Phone >
server with which environment, Server
the IP phone you do not need Setting:
registers is used. to specify the
port number. The l CallOutProxySe
NOTE
value is rverAddress: Set
The IP phone
registers with the automatically this parameter to
proxy server with pushed by the the address of the
preference. If the
AA server. active proxy
proxy server address server.
you have specified is l In an IMS
incorrect, the IP network l CallOutBackupS
phone will continue environment, erverAddress:
its attempt to register
this parameter is Set this parameter
with this incorrect to the address of
address and does not set by
administrator. the standby proxy
register with the SIP
server. This will
server.
cause a registration l CallOutProxySe
failure. Therefore, if rver2Address:
the proxy server is Set this parameter
not required, leave
the address of the
to the address of
proxy server empty. standby proxy
server 2.
l CallOutProxySe
rver3Address:
Set this parameter
to the address of
standby proxy
server 3.
l CallOutLocalSer
verAddress: Set
this parameter to
the address of the
local proxy
server.
Example:
CallOutProxyServer-
Address="192.168.1.
10"


the Configuration
File
SIP Transport Indicates the SIP Set this parameter Parameter:

transmission mode. based on TransferMode
Three options are requirements. Location: Device >
available: UDP, l If SIP ComCfg > Phone >
TLS, and TCP. Transport is set Server
UDP: short for User to Default, the Setting:
Datagram Protocol. account uses the
This SIP l 3: Default (UDP)
phone's SIP
transmission mode transmission l 2: TCP
applies to networks mode. l 1: TLS
with insufficient
l If SIP l 0: UDP
bandwidth.
Transport is set
TCP: short for Example:
to UDP, TCP, or
Transmission TransferMode="3"
TLS, the account
Control Protocol. uses its own
This SIP transmission
transmission mode mode, free of
ensures the accuracy restrictions by
of signaling phone settings.
transmission. It is
NOTE
recommended when When SIP
the network Transport is set
conditions are good. to TLS, you need
to configure the
TLS: short for
time server or
Transport Layer manually set the
Security. This SIP time to the
transmission mode current time to
ensures the security prevent IP phone
of signaling registration
failure.
transmission.
Step 5 After account information is entered, click OK.
Step 6 Set the line match parameters listed in Table 6-7.

Table 6-7 Line match parameters

the Configuration
File
Line Indicates a phone You can adjust the Parameter: LineKey

line. Each account number of lines Location: Device >
can support multiple supported according UserCfg
lines. Only one line to your needs.
NOTE
can be active at any NOTE LineKey1 indicates
time; other lines are l eSpace 7910 the first account,
automatically placed supports a LineKey2 indicates
on hold. maximum of 6 the second account,
lines. and so on.
l eSpace 7950
supports a
maximum of 12
lines.
Account l The IP phone By default, each Parameter:

initiates a account is assigned ExtDataOne
registration with two lines. You can Location: Device >
the SIP server assign more lines for UserCfg
only when the an account based on
account in use requirements. Example:
matches the line. ExtDataOne="47002
NOTE
"
l Each eSpace An account can have
call transfer, local
7910 account can
conference, and other
be assigned a services during in-
maximum of 6 progress calls only
lines, while each when that account
eSpace 7950 has been assigned at
account can be least two lines.
assigned a
maximum of 12.


the Configuration
File
Function Selects the functions Four options are Parameter: BtnType

available for an available: Private, Location: Device >
account. Shared, Intercom, UserCfg
Centrex Num, and
CC. Value: 13, 14, 15, 23
l Private: a l 13: Private

common line for l 14: Shared
basic call l 15: Intercom
services
l 23: CC
l Shared: a shared
line Example:
BtnType="13"
l Intercom: a line
for intercom
calls.
l Centrex Num: a
line for calls
using the Centrex
number (group
short number).
This option is
available in the
IMS+UC
environment.
Centrex numbers
are configured on
the server and
replace user
numbers for the
call services.
l CC: a CC line
used for agent
linkage.
Peer Number Indicates the peer Enter a number Parameter:

number of the according to the ActionData
corresponding function selected. Location: Device >
function. When Feature UserCfg
Selection is set to This parameter can
Private, Peer be set only when
Numbers does not BtnType is set to 13
take effect. or 14.
Example:
ActionData="47002
"


the Configuration
File
Label Name Indicates the line Specify a name you Parameter:

name displayed on a prefer. LableName
line button. Location: Device >
UserCfg
Value: a string of
0–127 bytes
Example:
LableName="Freedo
m"
Calls Indicates the number Set this parameter to Parameter:

of calls for each line a value ranging from CallNum
button. 1 to 12. Location: Device >
UserCfg
Setting: Set this
parameter to a value
ranging from 1 to
12.
Default: 12
Example:
CallNum="12"
Step 7 Click Save to save the line match parameter setting.

View the registration status of the IP phone on the Account page. If Registered is displayed
for an account, the account is registered.
----End
Adding an Account and Configuring Line Match on the LCD Screen

Step 1 Choose Advanced > Accounts on the LCD screen as an administrator. For details, see section
Step 2 Press the Add softkey.
Step 3 Set the parameters listed in Table 6-8.

You can select an existing account, press the Modify softkey, and modify account
information.

Table 6-8 Parameters for adding an account on the LCD screen

Paramete Description How to Set
r
Account Indicates the ID used for an account to Ask the SIP server administrator for
register with the SIP server. The SIP an account or directly log in to the
server uses this ID to identify the SIP server to configure an account
account. When you dial a long number as the administrator.
(country code+area code+short NOTE
number), the short number is The phone's first account can be edited
displayed on the dialing screen. When but cannot be deleted.
you place a call using a short number,
the IP phone obtains the country code
and area code of this short number
from the AA server to route the call
and query the directory.
NOTE
eSpace 7910 supports a maximum of three
accounts, while eSpace 7950 supports a
maximum of six.
Password Indicates the password used to register Ask the SIP server administrator for
an account with the SIP server. a password or directly log in to the
SIP server to configure a password
as the administrator.
User Indicates the user name, which is l In a UC1.1, UC2.X, IMS, or

Name provided by the Voice over IP (VoIP) third-party network environment,
service provider. set this parameter based on
requirements.
environment, set this parameter
to the value (in format of
Account@Domain name)
specified on the SIP server.
l In an EC6.X network
environment, set this parameter
in format of Account@Domain
name
Label Indicates the name of an account In an IMS+UC network

displayed on a line button of the IP environment, the value is
phone. automatically pushed by the AA
(supported only by eSpace 7950) server.
NOTE
After you set the label name, the IP phone
automatically synchronizes it to the server.
If Displayname is enabled on the server,
the label name will be displayed on the
incoming call notification screen of the
called party's phone if a call is placed
using this account.

Step 4 Set the line match parameters listed in Table 6-9 in the Line Select area.
Table 6-9 Line match parameters on the LCD screen
Parame Description How to Set

ter
Line Indicates a phone line. You can adjust the number of lines supported
Each account can support according to your needs.
multiple lines. Only one NOTE
line can be active at any l eSpace 7910 supports a maximum of 6 lines.
time; other lines are
l eSpace 7950 supports a maximum of 12 lines.
automatically placed on
hold.
Function Selects the functions Four options are available: Private, Shared,
available for an account. Intercom, Centrex Num, and CC.
l Private: a common line for basic call services
l Shared: a shared line
l Intercom: a line for intercom calls.
l Centrex Num: a line for calls using the
Centrex number (group short number). This
option is available in the IMS+UC
environment. Centrex numbers are configured
on the server and replace user numbers for the
call services.
l CC: a CC line used for agent linkage.
Peer Indicates the peer number Enter a number according to the function
Number of the corresponding selected.
function. When Feature Selection is set to Private, Peer
Numbers does not take effect.
Label Indicates the line name Specify a name you prefer.

displayed on a line button.
Step 5 Press Done.
----End
6.4.3 Server
This section describes how to configure the network environment and servers (such as the SIP
server, directory server, and upgrade server) for the IP phone.
l If the SIP server address, SIP server port, proxy server address, and proxy server port are specified
in both Account Setting and Server, the settings in Account Setting prevails.
l If the preceding parameters are set only in Account Setting, these settings are used. If the preceding
parameters are set only in Server, these settings are used.


Step 2 Choose Advanced > Server.

The Server page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-5
Figure 6-5 Server


the Configuration
File
Network Indicates the network Set this parameter Parameter:

Environment environment of the IP based on NetworkingEnvir-
phone, with six options requirements. When onment
available: EC6.X, UC2.X, the IP phone Location: Device >
UC2.0, Asterisk, interworks with ComCfg > Phone >
Broadsoft, IMS+UC, IMS, other third-party SIP Environment
CC, and Others. servers, set this
parameter to Value range: 0-11
After the network
environment is changed, the Others. l 0: UC2.X
IP phone changes the Default: UC2.X l 1: UC2.0
default configuration file NOTE l 2: Others
and the default service A phone restart is
rights in service rights required to make the l 3: Asterisk
management accordingly. modified network l 4: Broadsoft
environment take
This facilitates the setting l 5: CC
effect.
and use of the IP phone.
l 6: IMS+UC
l 9: IMS
l 10: EC6.X
l 11: VFOneNet
Default: 0
Example:
NetworkingEnviron-
ment="10"


the Configuration
File
Login Type l In the EC6.X network Set this parameter Parameter:

environment, by default, based on AccessType
the account is used. requirements. Location:
l In the UC2.X network l Account Login: UIEMUser
environment, you can An account (for Value: 0 or 1
log in to your phone example,
using the phone number w00666666) will l 0: phone number
or AD domain account. be used for l 1: account
By default, the phone logging in to the Default: 0
number is used. When IP phone.
the AD domain account Example:
l Number Login: AccessType="1"
is used for login, you A phone number
must enter the AA server (for example,
address and port number. 0571666666)
l In the IMS+UC network will be used for
environment, you can logging in to the
log in to your phone IP phone.
using the account. NOTE
l In the IMS network l If an account is
environment, the user used, the AA
name is also required in server
authenticates the
number login.
account. When
l In the Asterisk network the account is
environment, you can successfully
log in to your phone authenticated, the
AA server
using the phone number.
delivers a phone
During the login, you number
need to enter the corresponding to
account, user name, and this account to
password. the IP phone for
registration.
l In the EC6.X
network
environment,
when an account
is used for login,
the uPortal server
authenticates the
account.


the Configuration
File
Disaster l Sequential: The IP Default: Parameter:

Recovery phone sends registration l In a UC2.X, DisasterRecovery-
messages to a SIP server EC6.X, IMS, or Mode
at intervals of half of the IMS+UC Location: Device >
registration interval. If network ComCfg > Phone >
the active SIP server environment, the Environment
fails, the IP phone default value is
registers with the Value range: 0 or 1
Sequential.
standby SIP server. If the l 0: Sequential
standby SIP server also l In an IMS+UC
network l 1: Simultaneous
fails, the IP phone
registers with the local environment, the Example:
SIP server. Services are default value is DisasterRecovery-
interrupted during the Simultaneous. Mode="1"
SIP server switching.
After the IP phone
registers with a SIP
server successfully, its
services become
available again.
l Simultaneous: The IP
phone registers with the
active, standby, and local
SIP servers at the same
time. If the active SIP
server fails, the standby
SIP server takes over the
services. If the standby
SIP server also fails, the
local SIP server takes
over the services. The
switching takes about 3s,
which is insensible to
users. After the
switching, services are
running properly.


the Configuration
File
SIP Server Specifies the phone Enter the IP address Parameters:

registration mode and the of the SIP server PrimaryRegServer-
SIP server address. based on your Address,
NOTE network BackupRegServer-
Server 1, Server 2, Server 3, environment. Address, and
Server 4, and Server 5
l In an EC6.X LocalRegServerAd
represent the active SIP dress
server, standby SIP server, network
standby SIP server 2, standby environment, the Location: Device >
SIP server 3, and local SIP SIP server is the ComCfg > Phone >
server respectively. CloudUSM Server
When the server switches to server. Enter the Setting:
Server 3, Server 4 or Server domain name of
l PrimaryRegSer
the CloudUSM
5, is displayed in the verAddress: Set
status bar of the phone.
server.
this parameter to
l In a UC2.X the address of the
network active SIP server.
environment, the
l BackupRegServ
SIP server is a
erAddress: Set
gateway of the
this parameter to
eSpace U1900
the address of the
series or
standby SIP
EGW1500 series.
server.
l In an IMS+UC
l BackupRegServ
network
er2Address: Set
environment, the
this parameter to
SIP server is a
the address of
gateway of the
standby SIP
eSpace U2900
server 2.
series. The SIP
server setting is l BackupRegServ
automatically er3Address: Set
pushed by the this parameter to
AA server. the address of
standby SIP
l In an IMS server 3.
network
environment, this l LocalRegServer
parameter is set Address: Set this
by the parameter to the
administrator. address of the
local SIP server.
l In a CC network
environment, the Example:
SIP server is a PrimaryRegServer-
gateway of the Address="192.168.1
eSpace U2900 .9"
series, a
UAP3300, or a
Session Border


the Configuration
File
Controller
(SBC).
l In a third-party
SIP server
network
environment, the
SIP server is a
third-party SIP
server.


the Configuration
File
SIP Server Indicates the port number of Enter the port Parameters:
Port the SIP server. number of the SIP PrimaryRegServer-
server based on your Port,
network BackupRegServer-
environment. Port, and
l In an IMS+UC LocalRegServerPo
network rt
environment, you Location: Device >
do not need to ComCfg > Phone >
specify the port Server
number. The Setting:
value is
automatically l PrimaryRegSer
pushed by the verPort: Set this
AA server. parameter to the
port number of
l In an IMS the active SIP
network server.
environment, this
parameter is set l BackupRegServ
by the erPort: Set this
administrator. parameter to the
port number of
l In a UC2.X, the standby SIP
EC6.X or CC server.
network
environment, use l BackupRegServ
the default value er2Port: Set this
5060. However, parameter to the
if 5060 is used port number of
for SIP signaling standby SIP
transmission, set server 2.
the port number l BackupRegServ
of the SIP server er3Port: Set this
to 5061. parameter to the
l In a third-party port number of
SIP network standby SIP
environment, set server 3.
this parameter to l LocalRegServer
the port number Port: Set this
of the third-party parameter to the
SIP server in use. port number of
the local SIP
server.
Example:
PrimaryRegServer-
Port="5060"


the Configuration
File
Proxy Server Indicates the address of the In an EC6.X Parameters:

proxy server. network CallOutProxySer-
The IP phone registers with environment, enter verAddress,
the proxy server with the signaling IP CallOutBackupSer
preference. If the proxy address of the verAddress, and
server address you have CloudUSM. CallOutLocalSer-
specified is incorrect, the IP In an IMS+UC verAddress
phone will continue its network Location: Device >
attempt to register with this environment, the ComCfg > Phone >
incorrect address and does value is Server
not register with the SIP automatically Setting:
server. This will cause a pushed by the AA
registration failure. server. l CallOutProxySe
rverAddress:
In an IMS network Set this
environment, this parameter to the
parameter is set by address of the
the administrator. active proxy
server.
l CallOutBackup
ServerAddress:
Set this
parameter to the
address of the
standby proxy
server.
l CallOutProxySe
rver2Address:
Set this
parameter to the
address of
standby proxy
server 2.
l CallOutProxySe
rver3Address:
Set this
parameter to the
address of
standby proxy
server 3.
l CallOutLocalSe
rverAddress:
Set this
parameter to the
address of the
local proxy
server.


the Configuration
File
Example:
CallOutProxySer-
verAddress="192.16
8.1.10"


the Configuration
File
Proxy Server Indicates the port number of In an IMS+UC Parameters:

Port the proxy server. network CallOutProxySer-
environment, the verPort,
value is CallOutBackupSer
automatically verPort, and
pushed by the AA CallOutLocalSer-
server. verPort
In an IMS network Location: Device >
environment, this ComCfg > Phone >
parameter is set by Server
the administrator. Setting:
l CallOutProxySe
rverPort: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of the active
proxy server.
l CallOutBackup
ServerPort: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of the standby
proxy server.
l CallOutProxySe
rver2Port: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of standby proxy
server 2.
l CallOutProxySe
rver3Port: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of standby proxy
server 3.
l CallOutLocalSe
rverPort: Set
this parameter to
the port number
of the local
proxy server.
Example:
CallOutProxySer-
verPort="5060"


the Configuration
File
uPortal Indicates the address of the Set this parameter to Parameters:

Server uPortal server, which must the uPortal server UPortalServerAd-
be set in an EC6.X network address. Obtain the dress
environment. address from your Location: Device >
network ComCfg > Phone >
administrator. Server
Setting:
UPortalServerAd-
dress: Set this
parameter to the
uPortal server.
Example:
UPortalServerAd-
dress="192.167.1.23
"
uPortal Indicates the port number of Set this parameter to Parameters:

Server Port the uPortal server. the port number of UPortalServerPort
the uPortal server. Location: Device >
Default value: 443 ComCfg > Phone >
Server
Setting:
UPortalServerPort:
Set this parameter to
the port number of
the active uPortal
server.
Example:
UPortalServerPort="
443"


the Configuration
File
AA Server Indicates the AA server Set this parameter to Parameters:

address, which is required the AA server PrimaryAAServer-
in an IMS+UC network address. Obtain the Address and
environment. address from your BackupAAServerA
NOTE network ddress
l Server 1 and Server 2
administrator. Location: Device >
indicate the active and ComCfg > Phone >
standby AA servers Server
respectively. When the
active server fails, the IP Setting:
phone can register with l PrimaryAAServ
the standby server to
erAddress: Set
ensure functional services.
this parameter to
l In the UC2.X network
the address of the
environment, if the AD
domain account is used for active AA server.
login, you must enter the l BackupAAServ
AA server address (in erAddress: Set
format of https://
this parameter to
AppAgent IP address) and
port number. the address of the
standby AA
server.
Example:
PrimaryAAServer-
Address="192.168.1
.35"


the Configuration
File
AA Server Indicates the port number of Set this parameter to Parameters:

Port the AA server. the port number of PrimaryAAServer-
the AA server. Port and
Default: 8081 BackupAAServerP
ort
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Phone >
Server
Setting:
l PrimaryAAServ
erPort: Set this
parameter to the
port number of
the active AA
server.
l BackupAAServ
erPort: Set this
parameter to the
port number of
the standby AA
server.
Example:
PrimaryAAServer-
Port="8081"
Directory l In an EC6.X network l If you select Directory, set parameters

Server environment, select by referring to 5.9.3 UC Directory.
uPortal. l If you select LDAP, set parameters by
l Specifies either a UC referring to 5.9.1 LDAP Directory.
directory server or an l If you select uPortal, set parameters by
LDAP directory server referring to 5.9.2 uPortal Directory.
in a UC2.X, IMS+UC
l In an IMS network
environment, the value
is delivered by the
uPortal server.
l Specifies only an LDAP
directory server in other
network environments.


the Configuration
File
Image Server Indicates the profile picture Enter the address Parameters:
server that stores contact and port number of primaryAdd,
profile pictures. This the image server. primaryPort,
parameter is configurable If both active and backupAddr, and
when Network standby profile backupPort
Environment is set to IMS picture servers have Location: Device >
+UC and Directory Server been deployed, set ComCfg >
to Directory. Server 1 to the ImageServer
In an IMS network address of the active Example:
environment, the value is profile picture server primaryAddr="192.
delivered by the uPortal and Server 2 to the 168.1.35",
server. address of the primaryPort="8081"
standby profile ,
picture server. backupAddr="192.1
Default: 8081 68.1.36", and
backupPort="8081"
Profile l Indicates the profile For detailed configurations, see 5.11

Server server that stores the Extension Mobility.
contacts, call history,
and configuration file in
a UC2.X, EC6.X or IMS
l Indicates the profile
server that stores the call
history and
configuration file in an
IMS+UC network
environment.
NOTE
In an IMS+UC network
environment, contact
information is saved on the
PGM server. The PGM server
address is automatically
pushed by the AA server. You
do not need to manually
configure it.


the Configuration
File
Upgrade Indicates the upgrade server Set this parameter to Parameter:

Server address. the URL of the UPF UPFURL
file, in format of Location: Device >
https://Upgrade ComCfg >
server IP UPFSeverInfo
address:Port
number/File Example:
directory/UPF file UPFURL="https://
name. 10.166.102.110:80/
directory/UPF-
eSpace7910.xml"
Diagnostics Address of the Diagnostics The diagnostics Parameter:

Server server. server address can ServerURL
be server IP address Location: Device >
or domain name. ComCfg > Log
Example:ServerUR
L="10.166.102.110"
or
ServerURL="https://
10.166.102.110:80"
CA Server Indicates the certificate See 5.6 Multi-Certificate Support.

server address. The IP
phone applies for
certificates using Simple
Certificate Enrollment
Protocol (SCEP).
XML Indicates whether to enable Enable: yes Parameter: enable

Delivery the push server function. Disable: no Location: "Device >
Server ComCfg >
XMLPushServer"
Example:
enable="0"
XML Indicates the address of the Set this parameter to Parameter:

Delivery XML delivery server. the address of the XMLPushServer
Server XML delivery Location: Device >
server. ComCfg >
XMLPushServer
Example:
addr="10.166.47.45"


the Configuration
File
XML Indicates the port number of Set this parameter to Parameter:

Delivery the XML delivery server. the port number of XMLPushServer
Server Port the XML delivery Location: Device >
server. ComCfg >
Default: 80 XMLPushServer
Example: port="80"
XML Indicates whether to enable Select Enable or Parameter:

Delivery authentication for the XML Disable. XMLPushServer
Server delivery server. If Location: Device >
Authenticati authentication is enabled, ComCfg >
on the XML delivery server XMLPushServer
sends XML messages only
to authenticated users. Value range: 0 or 1
l 0: Disable
l 1: Enable
Example:
enableAuth="1"
----End
Configuring the Network Environment and Servers on the LCD Screen

Step 1 Choose Advanced > Server on the LCD screen as an administrator. For details, see 6.2
Advanced Screen Access.
Step 2 Set parameters listed in Table 6-11.
Table 6-11 Server parameters on the LCD screen

Network Indicates the network environment of Set this parameter based on

Environment the IP phone, with six options requirements. When the IP
available: EC6.X, UC2.X, UC2.0, phone interworks with other
Asterisk, Broadsoft, IMS+UC, third-party SIP servers, set
IMS, CC, and Others. this parameter to Others.
After the network environment is Default: UC2.X
changed, the IP phone changes the NOTE
default configuration file and the A phone restart is required to
default service rights in service rights make the modified network
management accordingly. This environment take effect.
facilitates the setting and use of the
IP phone.

SIP Server Specifies the phone registration mode Enter the IP address of the
and the SIP server address. SIP server based on your
NOTE network environment.
Server 1, Server 2, Server 3, Server 4, l In an EC6.X network
and Server 5 represent the active SIP
environment, the SIP
server, standby SIP server, standby SIP
server 2, standby SIP server 3, and local server is the CloudUSM
SIP server respectively. server. Enter the domain
When the server switches to Server 3, name of the CloudUSM
server.
Server 4 or Server 5, is displayed l In a UC2.X network
in the status bar of the phone.
server is a gateway of the
eSpace U1900 series or
EGW1500 series.
eSpace U2900 series. The
SIP server setting is
automatically pushed by
the AA server.
l In an IMS network
environment, this
parameter is set by the
administrator.
l In a CC network
eSpace U2900 series, a
UAP3300, or a Session
Border Controller (SBC).
l In a third-party SIP server
network environment, the
SIP server is a third-party
SIP server.

SIP Server Port Indicates the port number of the SIP Enter the port number of the
server. SIP server based on your
environment, you do not
need to specify the port
number. The value is
the AA server.
l In an IMS network
environment, this
parameter is set by the
administrator.
l In a UC2.X, EC6.X or CC
network environment, use
the default value 5060.
However, if 5060 is used
for SIP signaling
transmission, set the port
number of the SIP server
to 5061.
l In a third-party SIP
network environment, set
this parameter to the port
number of the third-party
SIP server in use.
Proxy Server Indicates the address of the proxy In an EC6.X network

server. environment, enter the
The IP phone registers with the proxy signaling IP address of the
server with preference. If the proxy CloudUSM.
server address you have specified is In an IMS+UC network
incorrect, the IP phone will continue environment, the value is
its attempt to register with this automatically pushed by the
incorrect address and does not AA server.
register with the SIP server. This will In an IMS network
cause a registration failure. environment, this parameter is
Proxy Server Port Indicates the port number of the In an IMS+UC network
proxy server. environment, the value is
automatically pushed by the
AA server.
In an IMS network
environment, this parameter is

uPortal Server Indicates the address of the uPortal Set this parameter to the
server, which must be set in an uPortal server address. Obtain
EC6.X network environment. the address from your
. network administrator.
uPortal Server Indicates the port number of the Set this parameter to the port
Port uPortal server. number of the uPortal server.
Default value: 443
AA Server Indicates the AA server address, Set this parameter to the AA

which is required in an IMS+UC server address. Obtain the
network environment. address from your network
NOTE administrator.
l Server 1 and Server 2 indicate the
active and standby AA servers
respectively. When the active server
fails, the IP phone can register with
the standby server to ensure
functional services.
l In the UC2.X network environment,
if the AD domain account is used for
login, you must enter the AA server
address (in format of https://
AppAgent IP address) and port
number.
AA Server Port Indicates the port number of the AA Set this parameter to the port
server. number of the AA server.
Default: 8081
Direct Director l In an EC6.X network l If you select Directory,

ory y Server environment, select uPortal. set parameters by referring
l Specifies either a UC directory to 5.9.3 UC Directory.
server or an LDAP directory l If you select LDAP, set
server in a UC2.X, IMS+UC parameters by referring to
network environment. 5.9.1 LDAP Directory.
l In an IMS network environment, l If you select uPortal, set
the value is delivered by the parameters by referring to
uPortal server. 5.9.2 uPortal Directory.
l Specifies only an LDAP directory
server in other network
environments.

Image Indicates the profile picture server Enter the address and port
Server that stores contact profile pictures. number of the image server.
This parameter is configurable when If both active and standby
Network Environment is set to IMS profile picture servers have
+UC and Directory Server to been deployed, set Server 1
Directory. to the address of the active
In an IMS network environment, the profile picture server and
value is delivered by the uPortal Server 2 to the address of the
server. standby profile picture server.
Default: 8081
Profile Server l Indicates the profile server that For detailed configurations,
stores the contacts, call history, see 5.11 Extension Mobility.
and configuration file in a UC2.X,
EC6.X or IMS network
environment.
l Indicates the profile server that
stores the call history and
configuration file in an IMS+UC
NOTE
In an IMS+UC network environment,
contact information is saved on the PGM
server. The PGM server address is
automatically pushed by the AA server.
You do not need to manually configure it.
Upgrade Server Indicates the upgrade server address. Set this parameter to the URL
of the UPF file, in format of
https://Upgrade server IP
address:Port number/File
directory/UPF file name.
CA Server Indicates the certificate server See 5.6 Multi-Certificate

address. The IP phone applies for Support.
certificates using Simple Certificate
Enrollment Protocol (SCEP).
XML Delivery Indicates the address of the XML Set this parameter to the
Server delivery server. address of the XML delivery
server.
XML Delivery Indicates the port number of the Set this parameter to the port
Server Port XML delivery server. number of the XML delivery
server.
Default: 80
ACS Server Indicates the address corresponding Set this parameter to the ACS
to the TR069 service on the DMS. server address. For details
about the format, see section
6.4.10 TR069.

----End
6.4.4 Admin Password Change

This section describes how to change the administrator password.
l The administrator password can be changed only in HTTPS access mode for the sake of security.
l To ensure security, periodically change your password (administrator password). Ensure that the
password meets the complexity requirements.
l If you have changed the administrator password on the phone web page, the password for accessing
the phone's Advanced screen is changed accordingly.
l After a downgrade from V200R003C30 to V200R003C00 or earlier, the original administrator
password becomes unavailable and the password is restored to the default one (admin123). You can
change the password by changing the value of PassWord under Device > ComCfg >
WebAdminUserSecurity in the configuration file.

Step 2 Choose Advanced > Change Admin Password.

The Change Admin Password page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Change Admin Password

Configuration File
Old Indicates the Enter the current -

Password currently used password.
password. Default: admin123


Configuration File
New Indicates the The password must Parameter: PBKDF2Password

Password new password be a string of at least Location: Device > ComCfg >
you want to use. 8 characters WebAdminUserSecurity
containing at least
two types of the Setting: Enter your new
following: digits, password as required.
lower-case letters, Example:
upper-case letters, PBKDF2Password="Admin123
and special //"
characters. The value NOTE
cannot exceed 31 Take sufficient measures to protect
bytes. the administrator password.
Confirm Indicates the Enter the new -

Password confirm password again.
password.
----End
Changing the Administrator Password on the LCD Screen

Step 1 Choose Advanced > Password on the LCD screen as an administrator. For details, see
section 6.2 Advanced Screen Access.
Step 2 Set Old, New, and Confirm.
See Table 6-12 for detailed parameter descriptions
Step 3 Press Done.
----End
6.4.5 Media
This section describes how to set protocol parameters used for calls and conferences.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Media.


Figure 6-7 Media


the Configuration
File
DTMF Specifies the Dual Tone Set this parameter Parameter:

Transmission Multiple Frequency based on your DTMFTransferMo
Mode (DTMF) transmission network de
mode. Two options are environment. Location: Device >
available: Default: RFC2833 ComCfg > Media
l INBAND: In this Value: 0 or 1
mode, DTMF signals
are transmitted in l 0: inband
audio signals. This l 1: RFC2833
mode is not reliable Example:
for codecs at low bit DTMFTransferMod
rates. e="1"
l RFC2833: In
RFC2833 mode (out-
of-band mode),
DTMF signals are
transmitted using
RTP.
TeleponeEvent, a
special
rtpPayloadType, is
used to specify the
RFC2833 data
packet.
DTMF Payload Indicates the payload of Value range: 96-126 Parameter:

an RFC2833 packet for Default: 101 DTMFEfectLoadva
DTMF transmission. lue
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Media
Example:
DTMFEfectLoadval
ue="101"
Anonymize Whether to anonymize Value: 0 or 1 Parameter:

DTMF Number DTMF numbers. If this l 0: DTMF DTMFHideEnable
parameter is set to numbers are not Location: Device >
Enable, DTMF anonymized. ComCfg > System
numbers are displayed
in ciphertext. l 1: DTMF Example:
numbers are DTMFHideEnable
anonymized. ="1"
Default: Enable


the Configuration
File
iLBC Mode Indicates the Internet Set this parameter Parameter:

Low Bitrate Codec based on your ILBCMode
(iLBC) mode. Two network Location: Device >
options are available: environment. ComCfg > Media
l iLBC30: 13.3 kbit/s Default: iLBC30 Value: 20 or 30
for 30 ms frames
l 20: iLBC20
l iLBC20: 15.2 kbit/s
for 20 ms frames l 30: iLBC30
Example:
ILBCMode="30"
iLBC Payload Indicates the payload for Value range: 96-126 Parameter:
the iLBC codec. Default: 97 ILBCEfectLoadval
ue
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Media
Example:
ILBCEfectLoadval-
ue="97"
AAC-LD Indicates the payload for Value range: 96-126 Parameter:

Payload the Advanced Audio Default: 98 AACLDPayloadTy
Coding-Low Delay pe
(AAC-LD) codec. Location: Device >
ComCfg > Media
Example:
AACLDPayloadTyp
e="98"
G.722.2 Payload Indicates the payload for Value range: 96-126 Parameter:
the G.722.2 codec. Default: 100 G7222PayloadType
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Media
Example:
G7222PayloadType
="100"
G.722.1 Payload Indicates the payload for Value range: 96-126 Parameter:
the G.722.1 codec. Default: 99 G7221PayloadType
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Media
Example:
G7221PayloadType
="99"


the Configuration
File
Opus Payload Indicates the payload for Value range: 96-126 Parameter:
the Opus codec. Default: 112 OpusPayloadType
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Media
Example:
OpusPayloadType="
112"
Opus Sample Indicates the sample Value range: 16 Parameter:

Rate Rate for the Opus codec. kHzZ, 24 kHz, and OpusSample
48 kHz Location: Device >
Default: 48 kHz ComCfg > Media
Example:
OpusSample="2"
Ptime Indicates the Set this parameter Parameter: Ptime

packetization duration based on your Location: Device >
of the voice codec. For network ComCfg > Media
detail, see Table 6-14. environment.
Example:
Default: 20ms Ptime="20"
Net-ATE Indicates whether to Set this parameter Parameter: NetATE

NOTE enable the function of based on your Location: Device >
The Net-ATE using redundancy network ComCfg > Media
function is transmission to adjust environment.
available from the packetization Value: 0 or 1
V200R003C00S Default: Enable
duration or transmission l 0: disable
PCb00.
rate of voice media l 1: enable
streams to reduce the
packet loss rate and Default: 1
improve the VoIP Example:
quality according to the NetATE="1"
varied network
conditions.
Noise Indicates whether to Set this parameter Parameter:

Suppression enable noise based on your NoiseRestrain
suppression. After noise network Location: Device >
suppression is enabled, environment. ComCfg > Media >
the IP phone suppresses Default: Enable SwitchInfo
noise in the collected
audio. Value: 0 or 1
NOTE l 0: disable
A greater noise l 1: enable
suppression effect results
in lower voice quality. Default: 1
Example:
NoiseRestrain="1"


the Configuration
File
Echo Indicates whether to Set this parameter Parameter:

Cancellation enable echo based on your EchoCancellation
cancellation. After echo network Location: Device >
cancellation is enabled, environment. ComCfg > Media >
the IP phone conceals Default: Enable SwitchInfo
the acoustic echoes that
occur in the microphone Value: 0 or 1
to minimize the effects l 0: disable
of the local audio card l 1: enable
shift.
Default: 1
Example:
EchoCancellation="
1"
Voice Activity Indicates whether to Set this parameter Parameter:

Detection enable Voice Activity based on your SilenceDetection
Detection (VAD). VAD network Location: Device >
helps conserve environment. ComCfg > Media >
bandwidth resources Default: Disable SwitchInfo
during audio calls.
Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Default: 0
Example:
SilenceDetection="0
"


the Configuration
File
Automatic Gain Indicates whether to Set this parameter Parameter:

Control enable Automatic Gain based on your AutomaticGain
Control (AGC). network Location: Device >
l With AGC enabled, environment. ComCfg > Media >
the IP phone Default: Disable SwitchInfo
automatically adjusts Value: 0 or 1
the volume and level
to deliver optimal l 0: disable
audio experience. l 1: enable
l The database engine Default: 0
provides interfaces Example:
for enabling or AutomaticGain="0"
disabling AGC and
for querying the
AGC status.
l The phone uses
digital AGC
(adjusting the PCM
waveform again) to
achieve automatic
gain control.
RTP Port Defines the port range Value range: Parameters:

for the IP phone to send 1024-65535 LOCALPORTMIN
and receive RTP Default value for and
packets. The IP phone Min. RTP Port: LOCALPORTMA
selects a port within that 10000 X
port range to send and Location: Device >
receive RTP packets. Default value for
Max. RTP Port: ComCfg > Media >
10100 Rtp
Setting:
l Set
LOCALPORT
MIN to the
minimum RTP
port number.
l Set
LOCALPORT
MAX to the
maximum RTP
port number.
Example:
LOCALPORTMIN=
"10000" and
LOCALPORTMAX
="10100"


the Configuration
File
Encoding Indicates the voice Select the voice Parameters:

codec. The IP phone codecs that you want AudioCapEnable
supports the following to use, and in the and AudioCap
voice codecs: G.711a, Rearrange column, Location: Device >
G.711μ, G.729AB, G. click the Up or ComCfg > Media
722, iLBC, AAC-LD, Down arrow button
G.722.1, G.722.2, and to adjust the codec Setting:
Opus. priority. l AudioCapEnabl
NOTE NOTE e indicates the
After a downgrade from The iLBC voice voice codec
V200R003C00, you need codec can be enabled switch. To enable
to delete the Opus codec only when the a codec, set this
by restoring the IP phone settings of iLBC parameter to 1.
to its factory defaults or Mode and Ptime are
delivering configurations consistent. For
To disable a
to the IP phone. example, if iLBC codec, set this
Mode is set to parameter to 0.
iLBC30 but Ptime is l AudioCap
set to 20ms, the iLBC
voice codec cannot
indicates the
be enabled. voice codec
priority.
The value ranges
from 1 to 65535.
A larger value
indicates a lower
priority.
Example:
G711AENABLE="1
" and
G711APRIORITY=
"1" (indicating that
G.711a is enabled
and its priority is
highest)
Table 6-14 Packetization durations of the voice codec

Codec Packetization Duration
G.711 A/U 10ms/20ms/30ms
G.729 AB 10ms/20ms/30ms
iLbc20 20ms
iLbc30 30ms
G.722 10ms/20ms/30ms

Codec Packetization Duration
Opus 16k 20ms/40ms/60ms
G.722.1 20ms/40ms
G.722.2 20ms/40ms
AAC-LD 10ms/20ms
----End
6.4.6 SIP Signaling

This section describes how to set parameters for SIP signaling exchanged between the IP
phone and the SIP servers.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > SIP Signaling.

The SIP Signaling page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8 SIP Signaling

the Configuration
File
SIP Registration Indicates the Set this parameter Parameter:

Cycle registration interval. depending on your RegistTimeout
The IP phone sends needs. Location: Device >
registration Value range: ComCfg > Phone >
messages to a SIP 30-2147483647 Sip
server at intervals of
half of the Unit: second Unit: second
registration interval. Default: 600 Example:
RegistTimeout="600
"


the Configuration
File
Re-registration Indicates the interval Set this parameter Parameter:

Interval for the IP phone to depending on your RegistSendPeriods
re-register with the needs. Location: Device >
SIP server upon its Value range: 0-1800 ComCfg > Phone >
registration failure. Sip
Unit: second
Default: 10 Unit: second
Example:
RegistSendPeriods=
"10"
Local SIP Port Indicates the local Value range: Parameter:

SIP port for 1024-65534 LocalPort
transmitting SIP Default: 5060 Location: Device >
signaling. ComCfg > Phone >
Sip
Example:
LocalPort="5060"
SIP T1(ms) Indicates the round Set this parameter Parameter:

trip time (RTT) based on your SessionTime1
between the server network Location: Device >
and the client (IP environment. If the ComCfg > Phone >
phone). network latency is Sip
long, set this
parameter to a larger Unit: ms
value to ensure Example:
stability. SessionTime1="500
Value range: "
1-2147483647
Unit: ms
Default: 500
SIP T2(ms) Indicates the SIP T2 Value range: Parameter:

timer period. The T2 1-2147483647 SessionTime2
timer defines the Unit: ms Location: Device >
interval between the ComCfg > Phone >
INVITE response Default: 4000
Sip
and the non-INVITE
request. Unit: ms
Example:
SessionTime2="400
0"


the Configuration
File
Call Re-initiation Indicates the interval Set this parameter Parameter:

Interval for the IP phone to depending on your InviteSwitchTime
re-initiate a call. In needs. Location: Device >
the scenario where Value range: 3-16 ComCfg > Phone >
the IP phone Sip
registers with Unit: second
multiple SIP servers Default: 3 Value range:
at the same time, 3000-16000
when the IP phone Unit: ms
initiates a call, Example:
l If SIP server 1 InviteSwitchTime="
(active SIP 3000"
server) does not
respond within
the time
specified by Call
Re-initiation
Interval, the IP
phone initiates a
call to SIP server
2 (standby SIP
server).
l If SIP server 2
also fails to
respond within
that period, the
IP phone initiates
a call to SIP
server 3 (local
SIP server).
l If SIP server 3
also fails to
respond within
that period, the
call fails.
Subscription Interval Indicates the update Set this parameter Parameter:

interval for depending on your SubscribeTimeout
voicemail, dialog, needs. Location: Device >
and call-info Value range: ComCfg > Phone >
subscription. 1-1209600 Sip
Unit: second Unit: second
NOTE SubscribeTimeout="
The value cannot 3600"
exceed the server's
subscription interval.


the Configuration
File
SIP TLS keep-alive NAT traversal keep- Value range: 15~600 Parameter:
duration alive duration when Unit: second SIPTLSActiveTime
an IP phone registers Location: Device >
in SIP TLS mode Default: 300
ComCfg > Phone >
during connection to Sip
HUAWEI CLOUD.
Unit: second
Example:
SIPTLSActiveTime
="300"
SIP Session Timer Indicates whether to Set this parameter Parameter:

enable the SIP depending on your enableSessionTim-
session timer. If the needs. er
SIP session timer is Default: Disable Location: Device >
enabled, the IP ComCfg > Phone >
phone periodically After the SIP session
Sip
sends the UPDATE timer is enabled, you
message during a need to: Value: 0 or 1
session to ensure 1. Set the session l 0: disable
that the session stays keep-alive l 1: enable
in activated state. duration. Example:
2. Select the session enableSessionTim-
update mode. er="0"
Session Update Entity that sends the Default: UAC Parameter:

Mode Update or Reinvite SessionUpdateMod
message in session e
keep-alive. Location: Device >
ComCfg >
SessionUpdateMod
e
Value: 0 or 1
l 1: UAS
l 0: UAC
Example:
SessionUpdateMode
="0"


the Configuration
File
Registration Status Indicates whether to Set this parameter Parameter:

Subscription enable registration depending on your enableRegistSta-
status subscription needs. tusSubscribe
for the IP phone. If Default: Enable Location: Device >
registration status ComCfg > Phone >
subscription is Sip
enabled for an IP
phone, the IP phone Value: 0 or 1
receives a l 0: disable
notification from the l 1: enable
server when the
account of this IP Example:
phone is logged in enableRegistStatus-
from a remote Subscribe="1"
location.
Called Name Whether to display Default: Disable Parameter:

Display the called party's enableResponsePA
name on the calling I
party's phone if the Location: Device >
IP phone is the ComCfg > Phone >
called party. Sip
Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Example:
enableResponsePAI
="0"


the Configuration
File
PAI Header Field Specifies whether Set this parameter Parameter:

the IP phone parses depending on your PAIpriority
user information needs. Location: Device >
from the P-Asserted- Default: Disable ComCfg > Phone >
Identity (PAI) Sip
header field or the When the PAI
FROM header field header field is Value: 0 or 1
when a call comes enabled, users can l 0: disable
in. Two options are enjoy the Connected
Name Identification l 1: enable
available:
Presentation Example:
l Enable: The IP (CONP) service, PAIpriority="0"
phone parses which allows the
user information called party's name
from the PAI to be displayed on
header field the phone screen of
when a call the calling party.
comes in.
l Disable: The IP
phone parses
user information
from the FROM
header field
when a call
comes in.
user=phone Indicates whether to Default: Enable Parameter:

send a SIP message UserType
that contains Location: Device >
user=phone in the ComCfg > Phone >
URI in the header Sip
field to the server
when placing a call. Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Example:
UserType="1"


the Configuration
File
PANI Header Field This header field Default: Enable Parameter:

NOTE carries the location LBSparacarriedfla
PANI header field is information in g
available from registration and call Location:
V200R003C00SPCb signaling.
00. Phone.Global
Value: 0 or 1
l 1: enable
l 0: disable
Default: 1
Example:
LBSparacarriedflag
="1"
NOTE
When place an
emergency call in the
UC2.X environment,
the SIP message will
contain PANI header
field even if this
parameter is set to
disable.
P-Early-Media If Enable is selected, Default: Disable Parameter:

Header Field the Invite message enablePEM
NOTE of the calling party Location:
P-Early-Media carries the P-Early- DeviceComCfgPho
Header Filed is Media header field. neSip
available from
V200R003C00SPCe0 Value: 0 or 1
0.
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Default: 1
Example:
enablePEM="1"


the Configuration
File
Register Upon The phone starts re- Default: Disable Parameter:

Notify registration or enableReregistra-
NOTE deregistration when tion
Register Upon Notify receiving the Notify Location: Device >
is available from message. ComCfg > Phone >
V200R003C00SPCd
00. Sip
Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Default: 0
Example:
enableReregistra-
tion="0"
Signaling Returned Indicates the Select 603 for the Parameter:

Upon Call Rejection signaling that the IP One Number Link RejectCallType
phone returns when You (ONLY) Location: Device >
it rejects a call. The service. ComCfg > Phone >
options are 486, 603, Default: Sip
404, and 480.
l UC2.X, UC2.0, Value range: 1-4
Broadsoft, CC, l 1: 486
IMS, IMS+UC,
Asterisk and l 2: 603
Other third-party l 3: 404
networks: 486 l 4: 480
l EC6.X: 603 Example:
RejectCallType="2"
Signaling Returned Signaling that the IP Default: 182 Parameter:

Upon Call Waiting phone returns in call AlertType
NOTE waiting. The options Location: Device >
Signaling returned are 180 and 182. ComCfg > Phone >
upon call waiting is
Sip
available from
V200R003C00SPCb Value range: 0 or 1
00.
l 0: 180
l 1: 182
Example:
AlertType="1"


the Configuration
File
ALLOW Header Specifies the It is recommended Parameters:

Field Setting parameters that the that you use the ALLOWMESSAG
ALLOW header default setting. That E,
field of SIP is, select all the ALLOWPRACK,
signaling needs to options. ALLOWUPDAT,
support. ALLOWSUBSCRI
BE, ALLOWINFO,
ALLOWREFER,
and
ALLOWNOTIFY
Location: Device >
ComCfg > Phone >
Sip
Value: 0 or 1
l 0: The ALLOW
header field is
not allowed to
carry the specific
parameter.
l 1: The ALLOW
header field is
allowed to carry
the specific
parameter.
Example:
ALLOWMESSAGE
="1" (indicating that
the ALLOW header
field is allowed to
carry the
MASSAGE
parameter)
# Escape (only for After it is enabled, Default: Enable Parameter:

VFOneNet) the IP phone escapedpoundkey
interprets the Location: Device >
number sign (#) in ComCfg >
the SIP URI as escapekey
%23.
Value range: 0 or 1
l 0: Disable
l 1: Enable
Example:
escapedpoundkey="
1"


the Configuration
File
Support Header Specifies the The 100rel Parameter:

Field parameters that the parameter indicating enableSendPrack
Support header field whether to enable Location: Device >
of SIP signaling the function of ComCfg > Phone >
needs to support. responding to the Sip
1XX provisional
response. Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Example:
enableSendPrack="1
"
Service Rights After you select Set this parameter Parameter:

Subscription Enable, the server based on ServiceRightSub-
pushes related requirements. scribeType
service rights to the Default: Enable Location: Device >
IP phone using the ComCfg > Phone >
Notify message. Sip
In a UC2.X, Value: 0 or 1
Broadsoft, CC, or
other network l 0:
environment, the as_feature_event
subscription type is l 1: UA_Profile
as_feature_event Default: 0
by default.
Example:
In an IMS or EC6.X ServiceRightSub-
network scribeType="1"
environment, the
subscription type is Parameter:
UA_Profile by enbleServiceRight-
default. Sub
In UC2.0, IMS+UC, Location: Device >
and Asterisk ComCfg > Phone >
network Sip
environments, this Value: 0 or 1
configuration item is
l 0: disable
not available.
l 1: enable
Example:
enbleServiceRight-
Sub="1"
----End

6.4.7 Diagnostics
This section describes the phone diagnostics types and the methods of exporting diagnostics.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Diagnostics.

Figure 6-9 Diagnostics
Table 6-16 Diagnostics parameters

the Configuration
File
Diagnostics Records key The IP phone Parameter: Enable

operations, such as records diagnostics Location:
modification of the when the diagnostics Diagnostics
configuration file function is enabled.
parameters, upgrade Value: 0 or 1
Default: Enable
operations, and l 0: disable
registration l 1: enable
operations together
with the registration Default: 1
result (success or Example:
failure). Enable="1"


the Configuration
File
Diagnostics Type Indicates the l error: diagnostics Parameter: Level

diagnostics level. at this level Location:
Four levels are record Diagnostics
available: error, unexpected data
warning, info, and or events that Value: 3, 4, 6, or 7
debug. have great l 3: error
impact and may l 4: warning
lead to partial
failure in l 6: info
operation and l 7: debug
follow-up Default: 6
services.
Example: Level="6"
l warning:
diagnostics at
this level record
events that are
generated when
the system status
differs from the
expected.
However, this
type of events
does not affect
system running.
l info: Diagnostics
at this level
record system
status
information
during the
normal system
running.
l debug:
Diagnostics at
this level record
debugging
information.
Step 4 Click Export, save the file as prompted.
You can also click Clear Logs to clear debug logs.
This function involves personal data. When using this function, comply with local laws and regulations,
and take sufficient measures to protect personal data.
----End

Diagnostics Description
Diagnostics provide internal system information when eSpace 7910 and 7950 malfunctions,
which is an important means of locating faults.
Figure 6-10 System diagnostics
Table 6-17 System diagnostics format

No. Description
Diagnostics type, including:

l O: operation diagnostics, which contain
the operations performed by system
users (including system administrators,
operation and maintenance engineers,
and system monitoring engineers) or
those initiated by the scheduled system
tasks.
l S: system diagnostics, which contain key
activities generated during the system
running.
l s: security diagnostics, which contain
activities of system users (including
system administrators, operation and
maintenance engineers, and system
monitoring engineers). These activities
include login, logout, and authentication.
l D: debug diagnostics, which contain the
system debugging operations performed
by R&D engineers. Such diagnostics
facilitate code correction for R&D
engineers.
Diagnostics level, including error, warning,

info, and debug (importance in descending
order).
Date and time when diagnostics are

generated.

No. Description
Internal modules that generate diagnostics.

The modules include UI, service, and
control modules.
UI modules:
l ui: user interface.
l web: user web.
Service module:
l callctrl: call control
l sipc: SIP protocol
l vpp: VPP protocol stack
l mproc: media control
l oc: service management
Control module:
l cfm: configuration management
l cwmp: CPE WAN management protocol
l dhcp: DHCP
l log: diagnostics
l msg: message
l upg: upgrade
l dev: device
Diagnostics line number.
Time when diagnosis is generated, accurate

to milliseconds.
l P: indicates the process ID.

l T: indicates the thread ID.
Detailed diagnostics information.
6.4.8 Configuration File

This section describes how to locally import or export a configuration file.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Configuration File.

The Configuration File page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-11.

Figure 6-11 Configuration File
Step 3 On the Configuration File page, you can export the configuration file to query the current
phone configuration, or import the modified configuration file to the IP phone to update the
phone configuration. For more information, see the eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone
Configuration File Parameter Description.
The configuration file must be encoded using UTF-8.
----End
If you only need to deliver part of the configurations in the configuration file, add the
MFlag="1" field to the configuration items to deliver.
Assuming that the original fields in the configuration file are as follows:
<Lang language="zh-CN"/>
If you want to change lang to en-US and no longer deliver the CallOut configuration, change
the configuration file as follows:
<Lang MFlag="1" language="en-US"/>
After the change, only the lang configuration is delivered and the language is changed to
English.
The file name cannot contain such characters as ; / ? : @ & # ' = + $ ,.
When customizing the factory configuration file for IP phones, add Mflag="1" to the customized
configuration items and delete other non-customized configuration items. Ensure the integrity of the
configuration file.
The following is an example of a customized factory configuration file:

<InternetGatewayDeviceConfig TimeMark="">
<Device>
<ComCfg>
<ManagementServer MFlag="1" URL="https://192.168.90.23:8444/tr069/
services/acs" Username="eSight" Password="eSight*123"
PeriodicInformEnable="1" PeriodicInformInterval="600" ParameterKey=""
ConnectionRequestURL="" ConnectionRequestUsername="huawei"
ConnectionRequestPassword="huawei123" ConnectionAuthType="2"
SpecVersion="1.0" enable="1"/>
<Phone>
<Audio MFlag="1" maxSpeakerPlus="0"/>
<Environment MFlag="1" Verson="0" NetworkingEnvironment="0"

NetWorkModel="0" DnsSrvsupport="0" DisasterRecoveryMode="0"/>

</Phone>
<Lock MFlag="1" lockPhone="0" isLock="0" mode="1" LocalPasswd="******"
enableLock="0"/>
</ComCfg>
</Device>
</InternetGatewayDeviceConfig>
6.4.9 Upgrade
This section describes how to configure automatic batch configuration, automatic upgrade,
and manual upgrade.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Upgrade.

The Upgrade page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 Upgrade


the Configuration
File
Automatic Indicates whether to See 4.3.1 Batch Parameter: enable

Deployment enable automatic Configuration. Location: Device >
deployment. After Default: Enable ComCfg >
automatic AutoDispose
deployment is
enabled, the IP Value: 0 or 1
phone obtains the l 0: disable
URL of the UPF file l 1: enable
from the DHCP
server once it is Example:
powered on. enable="1"
According to the
addresses specified
in the UPF file, the
IP phone obtains the
configuration file,
firmware version
file, and other
necessary files for
update.
Automatic Upgrade Indicates whether to See 7.2.4 Parameter:

enable automatic Automatic ISAUTOUPG
upgrade. With Upgrade. Location: Device >
automatic upgrade Default: Disable ComCfg >
enabled, the IP UpgrdCycInfo
phone periodically
detects whether new Value: 0 or 1
upgrade files are l 0: disable
available on the
server and if there is l 1: enable
any, automatically Example:
upgrades its version. ISAUTOUPG="1"


the Configuration
File
Automatic Upgrade Indicates the interval Set this parameter to Parameter:

Interval for the IP phone to Everyday, One UPGRDCYC
check for new week, One month, Location: Device >
upgrade files on the or Three months ComCfg >
server. depending on your UpgrdCycInfo
needs.
Value: 86400,
Default: Everyday 604800, 2592000, or
7776000
Unit: second
Default: 86400
Example:
UPGRDCYC="8640
0"
Manual Upgrade Indicates manual See 7.2.5 Manual -

upgrade. You can Upgrade.
import a local latest
version file for
phone upgrade.
The file name
cannot contain such
characters as ; / ? :
@ # ' & = + $ ,.
----End
6.4.10 TR069
This section describes how to set parameters for connecting the IP phone to eSight/TMS.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > TR069.

The TR069 page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 TR069
You are not advised to manually modify the STUN server parameters on the phone web page. Instead,
set STUN server parameters on eSight, which then delivers the parameters to IP phones. For details, see
4.1.1 Setting STUN Server Parameters.


Configuration File
TR069 Indicates whether Enable TR-069 when Parameter: enable

to enable TR-069. eSight/TMS is deployed. This Location: Device >
If you select facilitates phone management ComCfg >
Enable, the IP in batches. ManagementServer
phone sends Default: Enable
session Value: 0 or 1
connection l 0: disable
requests to the l 1: enable
ACS. If you
select Disable, Example: enable="1"
the IP phone does
not send session
connection
requests to the
ACS.
ACS User Indicates the user It is recommended that you Parameter: Username
Name name used for use the default value. Location: Device >
eSight/TMS to Default: eSight ComCfg >
authenticate the ManagementServer
IP phone.
Example:
Username="eSight"
ACS Indicates the To ensure communication Parameter: Password

Password password used for security, change the password Location: Device >
eSight/TMS to periodically. ComCfg >
authenticate the Default: eSight*123 ManagementServer
IP phone.
Example:
Password="eSight*123
"


Configuration File
ACS Indicates the l Connected to eSight: Parameter: URL

Address URL for – In encrypted Location: Device >
accessing the transmission, set this ComCfg >
TR-069 service parameter to the URL ManagementServer
on eSight/TMS. in format of https:// Example:
eSight server address: URL="https://
8444/tr069/services/ 10.171.216.191 :8444/
acs. tr069/services/acs"
– In non-encrypted
transmission, set this
parameter to the URL
in format of http://
eSight server address:
8089/tr069/services/
acs.
– From the
V200R003C30SPC700
version, IP phones
support bidirectional
authentication during
access to eSight. In the
bidirectional
authentication scenario,
enter https://eSight
server address:32241/
tr069double/services/
acs.
l Connected to TMS:
– In encrypted
in format of
https://TMS
southbound server IP
address:8443/
comserver/node1/
tr069.
– In non-encrypted
in format of http://TMS
southbound server IP
address:9000/
comserver/node1/
tr069.


Configuration File
Default: https://
ucems.company.com :8444/
tr069/services/acs
NOTE
l You are advised to enter the
HTTPS-based address of the
ACS server.
l If ACS Address is
configured as follows, set
HTTPS to Disable on the
Advanced > Others page in
the IP phone web
management system to
prevent the IP phone from
failing to connect to eSight:
– The value of ACS
Address is in IP address
format.
– The domain name in
ACS Address is different
from the value of
Common Name in the
eSight server certificate.
Report Indicates the Set this parameter depending Parameter:

Interval interval for the IP on your needs. PeriodicInformIn-
phone to initiate a Value range: 0-65535 terval
connection Location: Device >
session to the Unit: second
ComCfg >
ACS. Default: 1800 ManagementServer
Unit: second
Example:
PeriodicInformInterv-
al="600"
CPE User Indicates the user It is recommended that you Parameter:

Name name used for the use the default value. ConnectionRequestU-
IP phone to Default: huawei sername
authenticate Location: Device >
eSight/TMS. No ComCfg >
configuration is ManagementServer
required on
eSight/TMS. Example:
Instead, the IP ConnectionRequestU-
phone reports its sername="huawei"
user name to
eSight/TMS in an
unsolicited
manner.


Configuration File
CPE Indicates the To ensure communication Parameter:

Password password used for security, change the password ConnectionRequest-
the IP phone to periodically. Password
authenticate Default: huawei123 Location: Device >
eSight/TMS. No ComCfg >
configuration is ManagementServer
required on
eSight/TMS. Example:
Instead, the IP ConnectionRequest-
phone reports its Password="huawei123
password to "
eSight/TMS in an
unsolicited
manner.


Configuration File
Authentica Indicates the Default: Digest Parameter:

tion Mode authentication ConnectionAuthType
mode. Three Location: Device >
options are ComCfg >
available: ManagementServer
l Basic: In Value: 1, 2
basic
authentication l 1: basic
mode, user authentication
names and l 2: digest
passwords are authentication
transmitted Example:
over the ConnectionAuthType=
network in "2"
plain text.
Therefore, it is
not a secure
authentication
mode, unless
it works with
some security
approaches.
l Digest:
Similar to
basic
authentication,
digest
authentication
authenticates
two
communicatio
n parties using
the secrets (for
example,
passwords)
that the two
parties know.
But unlike
basic
authentication,
digest
authentication
transmits
passwords in
ciphertext.


Configuration File
STUN Whether to When IP phones and the ACS Parameter:

enable the STUN server are separated by NAT, STUNEnable
server to function the STUN server is required Location: Device >
as the for connecting IP phones to ComCfg >
communication the ACS server. ManagementServer
transfer server. Default: disable Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Example:
STUNEnable="0"
STUN IP address of the It is recommended that you Parameter:

Server communication use the ACS server to deliver STUNServerAddress
Address transfer server. this parameter. Location: Device >
ComCfg >
ManagementServer
Example:
STUNServerAddress="
192.168.90.23"
STUN Port number of It is recommended that you Parameter:

Server Port the use the ACS server to deliver STUNServerPort
communication this parameter. Location: Device >
transfer server. ComCfg >
ManagementServer
Example:
STUNServerPort="347
8"
STUN User name for the It is recommended that you Parameter:

User Name STUN server to use the ACS server to deliver STUNUsername
authenticate the this parameter. Location: Device >
IP phone when ComCfg >
the IP phone ManagementServer
sends a
connection Example:
request to the STUNUsername="adm
STUN. in"
STUN Password for the It is recommended that you Parameter:

Password STUN server to use the ACS server to deliver STUNPassword
authenticate the this parameter. Location: Device >
IP phone. ComCfg >
ManagementServer
Example:
STUNPassword="admi
n123"


Configuration File
STUN Interval for the IP Set the parameter based on Parameter:

Keep-alive phone to send the onsite number of users. If STUNKeepAlivePer-
Period Bindingrequest the SBC is deployed onsite, iod
messages to the the STUN keep-alive period Location: Device >
STUN server. needs to be shorter than the ComCfg >
NAT table item aging interval. ManagementServer
Default: 150 Value: 10~3600s
Unit: s Example:
NOTE STUNKeepAlivePer-
This parameter is mandatory iod="150"
when the eSight manages the IP
phone cross the NAT.
----End
6.4.11 Ping Test

This section describes how to verify network connectivity using the ping command.
Verifying Network Connectivity Using the Ping Command on the Phone Web
Page
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Ping Test.

The Ping Test page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14 Ping Test
Step 3 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address to test and click Start. Then, wait for the
system to return the test result.
For example, you have entered the IP address 192.168.1.55. If the number of received packets
is the same as that of sent packets and no packet is lost, as shown in Figure 6-15, the IP
phone successfully connects to the 192.168.1.55 network.

Figure 6-15 Ping test result
----End
Verifying Network Connectivity Using the Ping Command on the LCD Screen of
the IP Phone
Step 1 Choose Advanced > Ping Test on the LCD screen as an administrator. For details, see section
Step 2 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address to be tested and click Start. Then, wait for
the system to return the test result.
For example, you have entered the IP address 10.174.206.45. If the number of received
packets is the same as that of sent packets, and no packet is lost, as shown in Figure 6-16, the
IP phone successfully connects to the 10.174.206.45 network.
Figure 6-16 LCD ping test result
----End

6.4.12 Others
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Others.

The Others page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 Others


the Configuration
File
Signal Tone Indicates the signal Select the desired Parameter: Tone
tones, including the country. Location: Device >
ringback tone, busy ComCfg > Signal
tone, and dial tone.
Different countries Value range: 0-11,
may have different respectively
signal tones. indicating China,
Australia, Brazil,
France, Germany,
UK, Mexico, New
Zealand, Spain,
USA, others, and
default (dial tone
being UK's and the
other signal tones
being China's)
Example: Tone="0"
Default: 11
Import Signal Imports a local Compress the desired -

Tone signal tone file to the signal tone file to a .tar
IP phone. The file file, name it signal.tar,
name cannot contain and import it to the IP
such characters phone.
as ; / ? : @ # ' & = +
$ ,.
XML App See 5.5 XML App.


the Configuration
File
Display Sets the third icon on When your network Parameter:

Message the phone's home environment supports the messageButton
screen as a shortcut voicemail, set Display Location: Device >
icon for accessing Message to Yes; ComCfg >
messages or otherwise, set Display DesktopMenuCfg
preferences. Two Message to No.
options are Value: 0 or 1
available: l 0: message
l Yes: The home l 1: preferences
screen displays Example:
History, messageButton="0"
Contacts,
Message, and
Apps.
l No: The home
screen displays
History,
Contacts, Pref.,
and Apps.
Log Out Indicates whether to Set this parameter based Parameter:

enable the logout on requirements. enableLogout
function on the Location: Device >
phone's Apps ComCfg >
screen. Two options DesktopMenuCfg
are available:
Value: 0 or 1
l Enable: The
Apps screen l 0: disable
provides the l 1: enable
logout function. Example:
If you select Log enableLogout="1"
Out, all login
accounts are
logged out of the
phone and the
Log In screen is
displayed.
l Disable: The
Apps screen does
not provide the
logout function.


the Configuration
File
Phone Lock Enable or disable Set this parameter based Parameter:

Enable Phone Lock. on requirements. EnableLock
NOTE l Enable: Users can Location: Device >
The function of choose SystemPhone ComCfg > Lock
enabling or
Lock on the phone Value: 0 or 1
disabling
phone lock is web page to set the
phone lock function Default: 0
available from
V200R003C00 and the lock delay. Example:
SPCb00.
l Disable: Users cannot EnableLock="0"
set the phone lock
function and the lock
delay on the phone
web page.


the Configuration
File
Unlock using Indicates whether to l Yes: The login Parameter: mode

account use the login password will be used Location: Lock
password password as the as the phone lock
phone lock password. Value: 0 or 1
password. l No: The login l 0: You can
password will not be specify a phone
used as the phone lock lock password.
password, and you l 1: The login
can specify a phone password will be
lock password. If you used as the phone
have not specified a lock password.
phone lock password, Default:
the password is left
empty. l EC6.X: 0
NOTE l Other network
environment: 1
l You can choose Apps >
System > Lock Example: mode="0"
Password on the phone
LCD screen and set the
phone lock password
on the screen that is
displayed.
l To ensure phone
security, periodically
change the phone lock
password. The
password must contain
at least four characters.
Ensure that the
password meets
complexity
requirements.
l In the EC6.X network
environment, if an IP
phone account has been
bound to a real IP
phone on the
CloudUSM server, set
this configuration item
to No to aovid failure
to unlock the IP phone.


the Configuration
File
PC Port Indicates the PC port l Enable: The PC port Parameter: enable

on the IP phone. is enabled. Location: PCPort
This port can l Disable: The PC port
connect to a PC for Value: 0 or 1
is disabled.
both the IP phone l 0: disable
and the PC to access l 1: enable
the Internet. Two
options are available Default: 1
for this parameter: Example:
enable="1"
Port Mirroring Indicates whether to Enable port mirroring. Parameter: Enable

enable port Default: Disable Location: Device >
mirroring. With port ComCfg > LAN >
mirroring enabled, Mirror
the data on the
phone's LAN port is Value: 0 or 1
transparently l 0: disable
transmitted to the l 1: enable
phone's PC port
when the phone's PC Example:
port connects to a Enable="1"
PC for network
access. This
facilitates fault
locating.
NOTE
Port mirroring allows
all phone data to be
mirrored, including
call service data. It is
recommended that
port mirroring be
disabled. If port
mirroring is required
for fault locating, it is
recommended that
data be encrypted
using HTTPS, SRTP,
or TLS to avoid data
leak.


the Configuration
File
USB Port Indicates the USB l Enable: The USB Parameter: enable
(available only port on the IP phone. port is enabled. Location: USBPort
for eSpace This port can l Disable: The USB
7950) connect to a USB Value: 0 or 1
port is disabled.
flash drive (for l 0: disable
importing and l 1: enable
exporting contacts,
wallpapers, and Default: 1
ringtones) or to a Example:
USB headset. enable="1"
Wi-Fi Indicates the Wi-Fi l Enable: The Wi-Fi is Parameter:

(available only on the IP phone. enabled. IsSupport
for eSpace l Disable: The Wi-Fi is Location: Device >
7950) disabled. ComCfg > WiFi
NOTE
Value: 0 or 1
The Wi-Fi
function is l 0: disable
available from
V200R003C00
l 1: enable
SPCe00. Default: 0
Example:
IsSupport="0"
Bluetooth Indicates the Enable: The Bluetooth is Parameter: IsSupport

(available only Bluetooth function enabled. Location: Device >
for eSpace on the IP phone. Disable: The Bluetooth is ComCfg >
7950) disabled. BlueTooth
NOTE
Value: 0 or 1
The Bluetooth
function is l 0: disable
available from
eSpace
l 1: enable
V200R003C30 Default: 1
.
Example:
IsSupport="1"
HTTPS After it is enabled, Set this parameter based Parameter: enable

Authentication the IP phone on requirements. Location: Device >
authenticates the ComCfg >
certificate sent from HttpsVerifyMode
the HTTPS server.
The default value is Value: 0 or 1
Disable. Default: 0
Example:
enable="0"


the Configuration
File
SIP TLS After it is enabled, Set this parameter based Parameter: enable
Authentication the IP phone on requirements. Location: Device >
authenticates the ComCfg >
certificate sent from TlsVerifyMode
the SIP TLS server.
The default value is Value: 0 or 1
Disable. Default: 0
Example:
enable="0"
Verify Server After it is enabled, Set this parameter based Parameter: enable
Domain Name the IP phone checks on requirements. Location: Device >
whether the server ComCfg >
domain name is TlsVerifyDomain
consistent with the
signature (specified Value: 0 or 1
by commonName) in l 0: disable
the certificate. The l 1: enable
default value is 0
(disable). Default: 0
NOTE Example:
This function enable="0"
supports only domain
name-based
verification. The IP
phone can perform
the verification and
set up the connection
only when the
commonName field
in the server
certificate is set
correctly (the real
domain name of the
server) and is not
empty or an IP
address. Otherwise,
the connection setup
fails.
802.1x Indicates whether to Enable: Use the login Parameter: enable

authentication use the login SIP SIP account and Location:
using SIP account and password for 802.1x AssociateSipDot1x
Account password for 802.1x authentication.
authentication. Value: 0 or 1
Disable: Use the MD5
account and password for l 0: disable
802.1x authentication. l 1: enable
Default: 1
Example:
enable="1"


the Configuration
File
Extension Indicates whether to Set this parameter based Parameter: Enable

Mobility enable extension on requirements. Two Location: profile
mobility. options are available:
Value: 0 or 1
l Enable: enable
extension mobility. l 0: disable
l Disable: disable l 1: enable
extension mobility. Default: 0
Incoming Call Indicates whether to l Enable: The new Parameter: Enable

Notification display the new incoming call Location: Device >
Window incoming call notification window is ComCfg >
notification window displayed during a CallInWindow
when a new call call.
comes in during a Value: 0 or 1
l Disable: The new
call. incoming call l 0: disable
notification window is l 1: enable
not displayed during a Default: 1
call.
Example:
Enable="1"
Contacts and Indicates whether to If you select Enable, a Parameter: Enable

Call History enable the call upon call is directly initiated to Location: Device >
Screen off-hook function. a contact selected on the ComCfg >
contacts and call history CallUponOffHook
screens when you pick up
the IP phone. Value: 0 or 1
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Default: 0
Example:
Enable="0"
Set busy tone Indicates the busy Set this parameter based Parameter: Time
timescale tone duration. on requirements. Location: Device >
ComCfg >
BusyToneTime
Value: 3-10
Default: 3
Example: Time="3"


the Configuration
File
Call History Indicates whether to If you select Enable, the Parameter: Enable
enable the query IP phone automatically Location: Device >
upon call function. queries a number of an ComCfg >
incoming or outgoing call QueryFromCalllog
in the call history and
displays the number Value: 0 or 1
information if the number l 0: disable
information does not l 1: enable
exist in the contacts or
directory. Default: 1
Example:
Enable="1"
BLF Indicates the Set this parameter based Parameter:

maximum number of on requirements. Maxnumber
status monitoring NOTE Location: Device >
numbers. For details about how to ComCfg > BLF
configure BLF, see the
eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Value: 1-10 or 1-120
Phone V200R003C30 User NOTE
Guide. eSpace 7910 supports
a maximum of 10
status monitoring
numbers, and eSpace
7950 supports a
maximum of 120
status monitoring
numbers.
Default: 10 or 20
Example:
Maxnumber="10"
On the phone's Advanced screen, you can also configure XML Apps using the same method as on the
web page. For details see 5.5 XML App.
----End
6.5 Call Status

This section describes how to view the call status, including the phone's audio rate and packet
loss information, during in-progress calls.
Step 2 Choose View Status > Call Status.
The Call Status page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-18.

Figure 6-18 Call Status
Step 3 View call status when the IP phone is having calls (see Table 6-21 for detailed parameter
descriptions).

Audio Rate Indicates the audio data bits transmitted per

unit of time.
Audio Packet Loss Rate Indicates the ratio of total lost packets to
total transmitted packets during audio
transmission over the network.
Coding Protocol Indicates the audio codec protocol used by

the IP phone.
Network Delay Indicates the duration from the time when a

party initiates a call to the time when the
peer party receives the call.
Network Jitter Indicates the packet delay variation.
Voice MOS Indicates the voice quality.
Remote Number Indicates the account of the peer phone.
SIP Account Indicates the account of the local phone.
Registration Information Indicates the registration information about

the local phone's account.
----End

Administrator Guide 7 Maintenance
7 Maintenance
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports version upgrade and configuration delivery in batch mode
(using eSight or DHCP Option 246) or single mode.
7.1 Quick Configuration (for a Single Phone)

This section describes how to quickly configure a single eSpace7910/eSpace 7950 on the web
page.
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the server and account information (listed in Table 7-1) from your
network administrator.
Table 7-1 Data plan for single phone configuration

Parameter Example Description
Network Environment EC6.X Indicates the network

environment of the IP
phone.
SIP Server 192.168.1.10 Indicates the IP address of

the SIP server in a UC2.X,
EC6.X, Asterisk, CC, or
third-party SIP server
network environment. You
do not need to obtain the
value in IMS+UC and
UC2.0 network
environment, because the
value is automatically

Parameter Example Description
Port 5060 Indicates the port number of

the SIP server in a UC2.X,
EC6.X, Asterisk, CC, or
third-party SIP server
network environment. You
do not need to obtain the
value in IMS+UC and
UC2.0 network
environment, because the
value is automatically
AA Server 192.168.1.11 Indicates the IP address of

the AA server, which is
deployed only in IMS+UC
and UC2.0 network
environment. The AA server
automatically pushes all
server information to the IP
phone.
Port 8081 Indicates the port number of

the AA server, which is
deployed only in IMS+UC
and UC2.0 network
environment.
Account 866666 Indicates the phone account

assigned by the SIP server.
User Name l EC6.X, UC2.X, Asterisk, Indicates the user name.

CC, or third-party l The user name is the
network environment: same as the account in a
866666 UC2.X, EC6.X, Asterisk,
l IMS+UC and UC2.0 CC, or third-party
network environment: network environment.
automatically pushed by l The user name is
the AA server automatically pushed by
the AA server in IMS
+UC and UC2.0 network
environment.
Password User@123456 Indicates the password for

the phone account assigned
by the SIP server.
l You have obtained the phone IP address (which is generally assigned by the DHCP
server). If a static IP address is required, you need to obtain the static IP address, subnet
masks, gateway address, and active and standby DNS server addresses from your
network administrator.

l You have obtained the switch VLAN information. Generally, the switch automatically
delivers VLAN information using LLDP. If the VLAN information needs to be manually
configured, you need to obtain the phone VLAN ID and priority, and PC port VLAN ID
and priority from your network administrator.
Context
The quick configuration can be used when only a few IP phones need to be configured after
batch deployment.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network cable and power cable of eSpace7910/eSpace 7950, and power on
eSpace7910/eSpace 7950.
Step 2 Configure the IP address for eSpace7910/eSpace 7950.
l If the IP address is obtained in DHCP mode, on the phone login screen, press the
Network softkey and use navigation buttons to access the Status > Network screen.
Record the IP address of eSpace7910/eSpace 7950.
l If a static IP address is used, set the IP address according to the data plan.
a. On the phone login screen, press the Network softkey and choose Network Access
> IPv4 Settings > Static.
b. On the screen that is displayed, fill in the IP address, subnet mask, gateway address,
and (optional) DNS server address.
c. Press the Done softkey.
Step 3 Access the phone web page as an administrator.
The default administrator account is admin, and the default administrator password is admin123.
Change the password at your first login to ensure security. Ensure that the password meets complexity
requirements.
Step 4 Choose Advanced > Server. On the page that is displayed, set Network Environment
according to the data plan.
Figure 7-1 Network Environment

A phone restart is required for the modified network environment to take effect.
Step 5 Choose Advanced > Configuration Wizard.

The Configuration Wizard > Network page is displayed.

Access Authentication 802.1x Enable 802.1x

(recommended).
Link Layer Discovery Link Layer Discovery Enable Link Layer

Protocol Protocol Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
if the switch supports LLDP.
After LLDP is enabled,
eSpace7910/eSpace 7950
obtains VLAN information
from the switch at intervals.
Packet Sending Interval Use the default value.
VLAN LAN Port Set this parameter

depending on your needs. If
you select Enable, the
VLAN function is enabled
for eSpace7910/eSpace
7950.
ID Manually fill out the value

according to the data plan if
the switch cannot deliver the
VLAN ID automatically.
This parameter specifies the
VLAN ID of the LAN port
on eSpace7910/eSpace
7950.
Priority Use the default value

(recommended).
VLAN Filtering on PC Port Select Enable if

eSpace7910/eSpace 7950 is
connected to a PC and if
VLAN IDs for the PC and
the IP phone need to be
differentiated.

ID Manually fill out the value

according to the data plan if
the switch cannot deliver the
VLAN ID automatically.
This parameter specifies the
VLAN ID of the PC port on
eSpace7910/eSpace 7950.
IPv4 Network Access Mode DHCP Select this access mode if

automatically obtains an IP
address from the DHCP
server.
Static Use the default value

because related values have
been configured on the
phone LCD screen.
PPPOE Fill out the PPPoE account

and password. PPPoE is
seldom used.
IPv6 Network Access Mode DHCP Select this access mode if

automatically obtains an IP
address from the DHCP
server.
Static Set it as planned.
PPPOE Fill out the PPPoE account

and password. PPPoE is
seldom used.
Step 7 Click Next.

The Configuration Wizard > Server Setting page is displayed.


SIP Server SIP Server 1 l Enter the IP address of

the SIP server according
to the data plan in a
UC2.X, EC6.X, Asterisk,
CC, or third-party SIP
server network
environment.
l In IMS+UC and UC2.0
network environment,
the IP address is
the AA server.
Port l Enter the port number of

the SIP server according
to the data plan in a
UC2.X, EC6.X, Asterisk,
CC, or third-party SIP
server network
environment.
l In IMS+UC and UC2.0
network environment,
the port number is
the AA server.
AA Server AA Server 1 Enter the IP address of the

AA server in a UC2.0
Port Enter the port number of the

AA server in a UC2.0
Step 9 Click Next.

The Configuration Wizard > Account Setting page is displayed.
Step 10 Enter the phone account, user name, and password according to the data plan, and click Save.
----End
7.2 Upgrade
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s can be upgraded in batches (using eSight, TMS or DHCP Option
246) or one by one automatically or manually.

Upgrade Preparation
Obtain the upgrade files (including the version, signal tone, language package, and certificate
files) of the target version for the desired phone model.
Scenario
Table 7-4 lists five upgrade modes and their application scenarios.
Table 7-4 Upgrade modes and scenarios

Upgrade Mode Description Application Scenario
Batch upgrade using eSight Use eSight for version For upgrading a large
upgrade of IP phones in number of IP phones on a
batches by following the UC2.X network
upgrade wizard. The
upgrade files include
version, signal tone,
language package, and
certificate.
eSight must be installed and
configured.
Batch upgrade using TMS Use TMS for version For upgrading a large
upgrade of IP phones in number of IP phones on
batches by following the EC6.X and UC2.X networks
upgrade wizard. The
upgrade can be started
immediately or at a
specified time later. For the
upgrade of a large number
of IP phones, the number of
concurrent sessions can be
limited.
TMS must be installed and
configured.
Batch upgrade using DHCP Specify the UPF file URL in For upgrading a large
Option 246 the Option 246 field of the number of IP phones on a
DHCP server and specify third-party SIP server
the addresses of the version, network
signal tone, language
package and certificate in
the UPF file for an upgrade.
eSight is not required.

Upgrade Mode Description Application Scenario
Automatic upgrade of a Set the upgrade interval for For dynamically upgrading
single IP phone an IP phone. When the a single IP phone at
upgrade interval expires, the intervals
IP phone automatically
checks for new version files
on the server and if there is
any new version file,
automatically starts its
version upgrade.
Manual upgrade of a single Import the local latest For manually upgrading a
IP phone version file to an IP phone single IP phone
using the web page for an
upgrade.
Precautions
Version rollback from V100R001C02SPC100 is not recommended.
You need to obtain a separate upgrade file for the eSpace 7903X expansion module. Then,
connect eSpace 7903X to eSpace 7950 for an upgrade.
In batch upgrade, it is recommended that each IP phone be allocated at least 1 Mbit/s
bandwidth.
After you have upgraded your IP phone from a version earlier than V200R002C00SPC500 to
V200R003C00 on web pages, ensure that the boot version of the IP phone is 1.3.0.16. If the
boot version is not 1.3.0.16, perform the upgrade again.
7.2.1 Batch Upgrade (Using eSight)

Batch IP phone upgrade operations on eSight include creating an IP phone group, connecting
IP phones to eSight, and managing version files. For details, see 4.1.6 Managing Version
Files.
7.2.2 Batch Upgrade (Using TMS)

Batch IP phone upgrade operations on TMS include creating an IP phone management
domain, adding IP phones to the management domain, uploading basic IP phone information,
and upgrading IP phones. For details, see 4.2 Using TMS.
7.2.3 Batch Upgrade (Using Option 246)

eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports batch upgrade (including version, language package,
signal tone and certificate files) using DHCP Option246 if eSight is not available.
Batch upgrade is similar to batch configuration during deployment. For details, see 4.3.1
7.2.4 Automatic Upgrade

eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports automatic upgrade at upgrade intervals or upon power-on.

Prerequisites
l The upgrade server is available.
It is recommended that you use the Apache server (a type of HTTP server) as the upgrade server. For
details about how to install and configure an HTTP server, see 8.5.1 Using the Apache Server.
l Upgrade files are available.
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 has five types of upgrade files:
– 1 Firmware Upgrade Image (version upgrade file)
– 2 Config File (configuration file)
– 3 Signal Voice File (signal tone file)
– 4 Language Package (language package file)
– 5 CA letter File (certificate file)
– 9 MFG File (Manufacturer specified configuration file)
For details about how to obtain the files, see 3.2 Required Data.
l The UPF file is available. For details, see 8.1 Preparing a UPF File.
NOTICE
In the UPF file, retain the code of only files required for phone upgrade.
Context
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 periodically detects whether new upgrade files are available on the
server and if there is any, automatically upgrades its version.
Procedure
Step 1 Enter the UPF file URL and enable automatic upgrade on the IP phone.
l For a single IP phone
– Configure the UPF file URL. Specifically, access the phone web page as an
administrator, choose Advanced > Server > Version Download Server >
Upgrade Server, and enter the UPF file URL on the page that is displayed. The
UPF file URL cannot contain any space and must be in format of https://HTTP
server IP address:HTTP server port number/UPF file directory/UPF file name, for
example, https://10.166.102.110:80/directory/UPF-eSpace7910.xml, and the port
number to use depends on actual network environment. The default port number is
80.
– Enable automatic upgrade. Specifically, on the phone web page, choose Advanced
> Upgrade > Automatic Upgrade. On the page that is displayed, select Enable for
Automatic Upgrade, select the required value from the Automatic Upgrade
Interval drop-down list box, and click Save.
l For multiple IP phones
– Set UPFSeverInfo > UPFURL in the configuration file (Config-eSpace7910/
Config-eSpace7950.xml) to the UPF file URL.

– Set UpgrdCycInfo > ISAUTOUPG in the configuration file (Config-eSpace7910/

Config-eSpace7950.xml) to 1.
Deliver the configuration file using DHCP Option 246. For details, see 4.3.1 Batch
Configuration.
Step 2 Save the upgrade files to the root directory of the upgrade server. C:\Program Files\Apache
Software Foundation\Apache2.2\htdocs is used as an example.
Step 3 Each time eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 is powered on or when the upgrade interval arrives,
eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 starts automatic upgrade.
Step 4 When the message "Upgrade?" is displayed on the phone screen, select Yes.
If no operation is performed 5s after the message "Upgrade?" is displayed, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950
also starts automatic upgrade.
Step 5 After the upgrade is complete, the message "Upgrade Success" is displayed on the phone
screen.
----End
7.2.5 Manual Upgrade

eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 supports manual upgrade.
Prerequisites
The version upgrade file in binary mode is available.
The file is released with the software version. You can download the file from UC&C >
Enterprise Communication > Unified Communications > IP Phone & Soft Terminals >
7900 Series IP Phone at http://support.huawei.com/enterprise.
Procedure
Step 1 Access the phone web page as an administrator and choose Advanced > Upgrade.
Step 2 In the Manual Upgrade area, click Browse next to Import Upgrade Package.
Step 3 Locate the version file to be upgraded on the local PC. Click Upgrade.
----End
Result
After eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 is upgraded and restarted, the message "Upgrade Success" is
displayed.
7.3 Configuration File Delivery

The configuration file can be delivered to eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s in batches (using eSight
or DHCP Option 246) or one by one.

7.3.1 Batch Delivery (Using eSight)

Batch IP phone configuration file delivery operations on eSight include creating an IP phone
group, connecting IP phones to eSight, and managing version files. For details, see 4.1.5
Managing Configuration Files.
7.3.2 Batch Delivery (Using TMS)

Batch IP phone configuration file delivery operations on TMS include creating an IP phone
management domain, adding IP phones to the management domain, uploading basic IP phone
information, and configuring IP phones. For details, see 4.2 Using TMS.
7.3.3 Batch Delivery (Using Option 246)

You can use DHCP Option 246 to deliver the configuration file to eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950s
in batches.
Batch upgrade is similar to batch configuration during deployment. For details, see 4.3.1
7.3.4 Local Import (for a Single Phone)

You can load a local configuration file to eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 using the phone web
page.
Prerequisites
The configuration file (Config-eSpace7910/Config-eSpace7950.xml) is available.
The configuration file is released with the software version. You can visit http://
support.huawei.com/enterprise, choose Software > Unified Communications and
Collaboration > Unified Communications > Unified Communications Endpoints > 7900
Series IP Phone, and download the configuration file of the desired version.
Procedure
Step 1 Access the phone web page as an administrator and choose Advanced > Configuration File.
Step 2 Click Browse next to Import Configuration File.
Step 3 Locate the configuration file to load and click Import.
----End
Result
After the configuration file is loaded, the Import Succeeded dialog box is displayed. The IP
phone then restarts.
Example
You can also click Export on the Configuration File page to export the phone's configuration
file. For details, see 6.4.8 Configuration File.

7.4 Factory Reset

This section describes how to restore factory settings for an IP phone.
Restoring Factory Settings on the Web Page

Step 1 Access the eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 web page as the administrator.
Step 2 Choose Advanced > Factory Reset.

The Factory Reset page is displayed.
Step 3 Click Factory Reset.
NOTICE
After a reset to factory defaults, all parameters of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 will be restored
to default values, and all information (including contacts, call history, imported signal tones,
language package, and customized wallpapers) saved in eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 will be
deleted. Therefore, exercise caution when restoring eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 to its factory
defaults.
If the IP phone has loaded the customized configuration file, the values of all parameters are restored to
those in the customized configuration file after the IP phone is restored to factory settings.
----End
Restoring Factory Settings on the LCD Screen

Step 1 Choose Advanced > Factory Reset on the LCD as an administrator. For details, see section
Step 2 Press the Restore softkey.
Alternatively, press and hold the home button for 10s and choose to restore factory settings as
prompted.
Pressing and holding the home button for 10s does not take effect when the phone is locked, being
upgraded, or on a call.
----End
7.5 Diagnose
This section describes how to perform IP phone hardware self-check.
The self-check help agents and enterprise administrators to determine whether a fault is an IP
phone hardware fault and whether to return the IP phone for repair.

Step 1 Choose Advanced > Diagnose on the LCD as an administrator. For details, see section 6.2
Advanced Screen Access.
Step 2 Perform IP phone self-check as prompted.
Self-check items include the Screen, Backlight, LEDs, Microphone, and System.
----End

Administrator Guide 8 Appendix
8 Appendix
This chapter describes how to set up servers and use tools required for the IP phone.
8.1 Preparing a UPF File

This section describes the method and example of how to prepare a UPF file.
Prerequisites
You have obtained:
l Hardware version number of the IP phone to upgrade

l Address of the HTTP/HTTPS server where the files for the IP phone to upgrade are
stored
l Target version number
l UPF template (which is delivered with the version release)
For information about the preceding three items, see 3.2 Required Data.
Context
l A UPF file defines the scope of the IP phones to upgrade and the upgrade policies.
l Before an upgrade, an IP phone obtains the UPF file from the preconfigured upgrade file
server. For eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, the UPF file name has been configured before
factory delivery and is in format of UPF-Product model.xml. Ensure that the name of the
UPF file on the upgrade file server is the same as the factory default, for example, UPF-
eSpace7910.xml.
l When you need to upgrade both eSpace 7910 and eSpace 7950, you can use a single
UPF file to define the upgrade file directories for the two models.
The UPF file must be encoded using UTF-8. You are advised to use Notepad++ to edit the UDF file.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the UPF template, as shown in Figure 8-1.

Step 2 Modify the parameters (see Table 8-1 for detailed parameter descriptions) in the UPF
template depending on your needs.
Figure 8-1 UPF template

No. Parameter Mandatory or Description
Optional
UPFDeviceInfo Mandatory l ManufacturerOUI: indicates the

manufacturer ID. The value can only be
huawei.
l ModelName: indicates the product
model. The value can only be
MediaPhone.
UpgradePolicy Mandatory NumberOfInstances: indicates the number

of instances in a UPF file, which is the
number of IP phone models to upgrade
using the UPF file. By default, the value is
1.
If you plan to use a single UPF file to
upgrade both eSpace 7910 and eSpace 7950,
set NumberOfInstances to 2. Then, copy
the information marked with , , and
in the figure, and tailor this copy for eSpace
7950.


Optional
UpgradePolicyI Optional UpgradePolicyInstance: specifies the

nstance upgrade policy information. An IP phone
can be upgraded only when its information
matches that specified in the following
parameters:
l HardwareVersion: indicates the
hardware version of the IP phone to
upgrade.
l SoftwareVersion: indicates the software
version of the IP phone to upgrade.
l IPAddress: indicates the IP address of
the IP phone to upgrade.
l SerialNumber: indicates the serial
number of the IP phone to upgrade.
NOTE
If the parameter values are separated using
vertical bars (|), the relationship between the
values is logical OR. If the values are separated
using colons (:), the value range is specified
(available only for IPAddress and
SerialNumber).
For example, HardwareVersion="*"
indicates that IP phones with any hardware
versions can be upgraded,
HardwareVersion="EP21MPUA VER.B"
indicates that IP phones with their hardware
versions being EP21MPUA VER.B can be
upgraded, and
HardwareVersion="EP21MPUA VER.B|
EP21MPUA VER.A" indicates that IP
phones with their hardware versions being
EP21MPUA VER.B or EP21MPUA VER.A
can be upgraded.
UpgradeFileInst Mandatory NumberOfInstances: indicates the number

ance of upgrade files.
InstanceID: indicates the upgrade file ID.


Optional
1 Firmware Optional Indicates the version file.

Upgrade Image l FileType: indicates the file type. This
parameter has a fixed value of 1
Firmware Upgrade Image.
l FileVersion: indicates the file version
number of the target software.
l FileURL: indicates the directory where
the file is stored, for example, https://
192.168.1.244/
eSpace7910V100R001C02B018.bin.
l UTC: indicates the current system time.
l Username and Password: indicate the
authentication on the file server. Change
the Username and Password values
based on the site requirements.
2 Config File Optional Indicates the configuration file.

l FileType: indicates the file type. This
parameter has a fixed value of 2 Config
File.
l FileVersion: indicates the file version.
Set this parameter to invalid.
192.168.1.244/Config-eSpace7910.xml.


Optional
3 Signal Voice Optional Indicates the signal tone file.

File l FileType: indicates the file type. This
parameter has a fixed value of 3 Signal
Voice File.
192.168.1.244/voice.tar.
4 Language Optional Indicates the language package file.

Package l FileType: indicates the file type. This
Language Package.
192.168.1.244/language7910_gr.tar.


Optional
5 CA letter File Optional Indicates the certificate file.

parameter has a fixed value of 5 CA
letter File.
192.168.1.244/cacert.pem.
If multiple certificates exist, compress
them into a .tar file, for example, https://
192.168.1.244/cacert.tar.
7 Wallpaper Optional Indicates the wallpaper file.

Wallpaper.
192.168.1.244/wallpaper.tar.
NOTE
Wallpaper files of the .jpg, .bmp and .png
formats are supported. The resolution must be
lower than 800*600. The total size of wallpaper
files delivered each time must be less than 2 MB.
A maximum of eight customized wallpapers are
supported. The total size of wallpaper and
ringtone files must be less than 10 MB.


Optional
8 ring tone file Optional Indicates the ringtone file.

parameter has a fixed value of 8 ring
tone file.
192.168.1.244/ringtone.tar.
NOTE
Ringtone files of 8 KHz sampling rate, 16-bit
sampling precision, and the .wav format are
supported. The total size of ringtone files
delivered each time must be less than 2 MB. The
total size of wallpaper and ringtone files must be
less than 10 MB.
- 9 MFG file Optional Customized factory configuration file.

l FileType="9 MFG file"
the customized factory configuration file
is located, for example, https://
192.168.1.244/defaultMFG_cfm.xml
UpgradeResult Optional Indicates the address of the server to which

the IP phone reports error information.
In the current version, this parameter is not
available.


Optional
UpgradeControl Mandatory l UserDecision="YES": indicates that a

dialog box is displayed asking users to
decide whether to upgrade the IP phone
when a new version is detected.
l UserDecision="NO": indicates that the
IP phone is directly upgraded when a
new version is detected.
l For the version file (1 Firmware Upgrade Image), FileVersion is mandatory and UTC is optional.
For the resources files (files numbered 2 to 6), FileVersion is invalid and its value can be empty,
while UTC is mandatory and its value is in the standard time format, for example,
1970-01-01T08:00:04. The value of UTC for a file determines whether the file is upgraded.
l IP phones support HTTP and HTTPS. HTTP is an insecure protocol. You are advised to use HTTPS.
l When compressing multiple files into a .tar package, directly compress them without creating a
directory and copying them to the directory first. On the Windows operating system, you can use the
7-Zip to compress files.
NOTICE
l The UPF file is designed to prohibit cyclic upgrade. For example, the settings of an
upgrade from version A to version B and from version B to version A are not supported.
l Changes in configuration tree (c_tree.xml) may lead to upgrading failure of
eSpace79XX.bin. It's recommended that putting eSpace79XX.bin file before c_tree.xml
when upgrading, or you can upgrade them separately.
l When the UPF File is used for deploying IP phones, only common configurations can be
imported. Personal configurations cannot be imported.
----End
Example
This configuration example demonstrates how to set the UPF file for upgrading the versions
and configuration files of eSpace7910 (hardware versions: EP21MPUA VER.B and
EP21MPUA VER.A) and eSpace7950 (hardware versions: EP11MPUA VER.B and
EP11MPUA VER.A) to V200R003C30SPC300:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<InternetGatewayDeviceConfig xmlns="urn:dslforum-org:cpe-device-config-1-0">
<UpgradePolicyFile>
<UPFDeviceInfo ManufacturerOUI="huawei" ModelName="MediaPhone"/>
<UpgradePolicy NumberOfInstances="2">
<UpgradePolicyInstance InstanceID="1" HardwareVersion="EP21MPUA
VER.B|EP21MPUA VER.A" SoftwareVersion="*" IPAddress="*" SerialNumber="*">
<UpgradeFile NumberOfInstances="2">
<UpgradeFileInstance InstanceID="1" FileType="1 Firmware
Upgrade Image" FileVersion="V200R003C30SPC300B013" FileURL="https://192.168.1.227/

eSpace7910V200R003C30SPC300B013.bin" UTC="2013-07-10T09:13:11" Username="admin"

Password="Admin*123"/>
<UpgradeFileInstance InstanceID="2" FileType="2 Config File"
FileVersion="invalid" FileURL="https://192.168.1.227/Config-eSpace7910.xml"
UTC="2013-07-10T09:14:11" Username="admin" Password="Admin*123"/>
</UpgradeFile>
<UpgradeResult ResultURL="https://192.168.1.227" Username=""
Password=""/>
<UpgradeControl UserDecision="YES" Source=""/>
</UpgradePolicyInstance>
<UpgradePolicyInstance InstanceID="2" HardwareVersion="EP11MPUA
VER.B|EP11MPUA VER.A" SoftwareVersion="*" IPAddress="*" SerialNumber="*">
<UpgradeFile NumberOfInstances="2">
<UpgradeFileInstance InstanceID="1" FileType="1 Firmware
Upgrade Image" FileVersion="V200R003C30SPC300B013" FileURL="https://192.168.1.227/
eSpace7950V200R003C30SPC300B013.bin" UTC="2013-07-10T09:13:11" Username="admin"
Password="Admin*123"/>
<UpgradeFileInstance InstanceID="2" FileType="2 Config File"
FileVersion="invalid" FileURL="https://192.168.1.227/Config-eSpace7950.xml"
UTC="2013-07-10T09:14:11" Username="admin" Password="Admin*123"/>
</UpgradeFile>
<UpgradeResult ResultURL="https://192.168.1.227" Username=""
Password=""/>
<UpgradeControl UserDecision="YES" Source=""/>
</UpgradePolicyInstance>
</UpgradePolicy>
</UpgradePolicyFile>
</InternetGatewayDeviceConfig>
8.2 Editing the Local Contact File

Prerequisites
The Tools.zip package has been obtained. The 7900&8950 contacts tools v1.3.xlsm file has
been obtained from 7900&8950 contacts tools.
For details about how to obtain the Tools.zip package, see 3.2 Required Data.
Exporting a Contact File

Export a contact file or template file from the IP phone for editing the contact information.
Step 1 Use a personal account to log in to the IP phone web page.
Step 2 Choose Preferences > Contacts.
Step 3 On the My Contacts tab page, click Export Template (no local contacts on the IP phone) or
Export (with local contacts on the IP phone).
Step 4 Select the vCard or .vcf file format.
----End
Editing a Contact File

Edit the contact file or template file exported from the IP phone.
Step 1 Open 7900&8950 contacts tools v1.3.xlsm using Excel.
Step 2 Enable macro in the document according to onscreen instructions.

Step 3 Click Import. Select and import the existing contact file.
If there is no local contact on the IP phone or you need to add contacts, you can import the template file
and edit it or directly add contact information in the 7900&8950 contacts tools v1.3.xlsm file.
Step 4 Edit contact information on the worksheet.

Step 5 Click Export in the upper right corner.
Step 6 The Addrbook folder (containing the Addrbook.vcf file) is automatically generated in the
directory where the 7900&8950 contacts tools v1.3.xlsm file is located.
----End
Importing a Contact File to the IP Phone

Import the contact file (Addrbook.vcf) exported from the tool to the IP phone.
Step 1 Use a personal account to log in to the IP phone web page.

Step 2 Choose Preferences > Contacts.
Step 3 On the My Contacts tab page, click Import and select the edited Addrbook.vcf file.
l If the Addrbook.vcf file contains modification about existing contacts, you are advised to clear the
original contact information on the IP phone before the import to ensure import success.
l If the Addrbook.vcf file contains only new contacts, you can directly import the file and does not
need to clear the original contact information.
Step 4 The contact file import result is displayed.
----End
8.3 Setting Up the DHCP Server
8.3.1 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the Windows Server

2008
Context
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) lets a device, known as a DHCP server,
allocate dynamic IP addresses to the other devices functioning as DHCP clients. To use
DHCP, a DHCP server must be deployed.
When a DHCP client sends a request for a dynamic IP address, the DHCP server provides an
available IP address and subnet mask for the DHCP client from the preserved IP address set.
The DHCP has two port numbers, that is, port 67 for the DHCP server and port 68 for the
DHCP client. This means that the DHCP client selects only port 68, rather than a temporary
port that is not used.
The two ports are selected because a response from the DHCP server can be broadcast.
Figure 8-2 shows the process for an IP phone to obtain the IP address through DHCP.

Figure 8-2 Process for an IP phone to obtain an IP address through DHCP
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Server Manager.
The Server Manager window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 Server Manager window

Step 2 Right-click Roles, choose Add Roles, and click Next.

The Add Roles Wizard window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 Add Roles Wizard window
Step 3 Select DHCP Server and click Next.

The Select Network Connection Bindings window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Select Network Connection Bindings window
Step 4 Select 192.168.1.12 and click Next.

The Specify IPv4 DNS Server Settings window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6 Specify IPv4 DNS Server Settings window
Step 5 Set Parent domain to the specified DNS domain name, for example, example.com .
Step 6 Set Preferred DNS server IPv4 address to the IP address of the local PC, for example,
192.168.1.12, and click Next.
The Specify IPv4 WINS Server Settings window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Specify IPv4 WINS Server Settings window
Step 7 Select WINS is not required for applications on this network and click Next.
The Add or Edit DHCP Scopes window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8 Add or Edit DHCP Scopes window
Step 8 Click Add.
The Add Scope window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Add Scope window

Step 9 Configure the scope.

l Set Scope name to the specified domain name, for example, example.com .
l Set Starting IP address and Ending IP address to the start and end IP addresses, for
example, 192.168.1.160 and 192.168.1.162.
l Set Subnet type to Wired (lease duration will be 8 days).
Step 10 Click OK.
The Configure DHCPv6 Stateless Mode window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10 Configure DHCPv6 Stateless Mode window
Step 11 Click Next.

The Authorize DHCP Server window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-11.

Figure 8-11 Authorize DHCP Server window
Step 12 Click Next and click Install.
----End
8.3.2 Setting Up the DHCP Server (IPv4) in the Windows Server

2012
Installing the DHCP Server
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel > All Control Panel Items > Administrative Tools, to open
the Server Manager.

Step 2 Click Add roles and features to access the Add Roles and Features Wizard window. From
the navigation tree on the left, choose Server Roles to access the Select server roles window.
Step 3 Select DHCP Server. In the displayed dialog box, select Add Features and click Next.
Figure 8-13 Select server roles
Step 4 In the Select features window, click Next.

Figure 8-14 Select features
Step 5 In the DHCP Server window, click Next to access the Confirm installation selections
window.
Figure 8-15 Confirm installation selections
Step 6 Click Install to start installing the DHCP Server.

Figure 8-16 Installation progress
Step 7 A message is displayed asking you to restart the DHCP server to complete its installation.
Figure 8-17 Results
----End

Authorizing the DHCP Server

Step 1 After the DHCP server is restarted, open the Server Manager and select the installed DHCP
server. The "Configuration required for DHCP Server at XXX" message is displayed in the
upper part.
Step 2 Click More in the message notification bar to open the All Servers Task Details and
Notifications window. Click Complete DHCP configuration in the Action column.
Figure 8-19 Notifications
If no message is displayed, you can click Tools in the upper right corner of the Server Manager
window and choose DHCP. Then, right-click the server name on the left and choose Authorize.

Figure 8-20 Dashboard
Figure 8-21 DHCP
Step 3 In the DHCP Post- Install configuration wizard window, click Next.

Figure 8-22 DHCP Post- Install configuration wizard
Step 4 In the Authorization window, click Commit.
Figure 8-23 Authorization
Step 5 In the Summary window, messages indicating that the DHCP server is authorized and the
security groups are created are displayed. Click Close.

Figure 8-24 Summary
----End
Configuring a Scope
Step 1 Open the Server Manager. From the navigation tree on the left, choose DHCP. In the pane on
the right, right-click the DHCP server and choose DHCP Manager.
You can also click Tools in the upper right corner and choose DHCP, as shown in Figure 8-20.

Step 2 Expand the navigation tree on the left, right-click IPv4, and choose New Scope.
Step 3 In the New Scope Wizard window, click Next.
Step 4 Set Scope Name (for example, to uc.com) and click Next.

Step 5 Set the IP Address Range.
For example, set Start IP address to 192.168.1.160 and End IP address to 192.168.1.170.

Step 6 Set exclusives and delay.
Step 7 Set the lease duration (8 days by default) and click Next.

Step 8 In the Configure DHCP Options window, select Yes, I want to configure these options
now and click Next to configure DHCP options (gateway/DNS/domain name).
Step 9 Set the default gateway (for example, 192.168.1.1) and click Add. Then, click Next.

Step 10 Set the DNS server name and IP address.
Step 11 In the WINS Servers window, leave the parameters empty as you do not need to set WINS
servers. Click Next.

Step 12 In the Activate Scope window, select Yes, I want to activate this scope now and click Next.
Step 13 Click Finish to complete the new scope wizard.

----End
8.3.3 Setting Up the DHCP Server on Router AR-28

Example
Log in to router AR-28 using a serial port and enable the DHCP server function on the router.
The following describes the configuration scripts and provides some explanations that help
you complete this task:
<Quidway>system-view //Enter the configuration mode.
[Quidway]dhcp enable //Enable the DHCP server function
of the router.
[Quidway]dhcp server detect //Verify the DHCP server function.
[Quidway]interface Ethernet 0/1 //Connect to network port 1 on
board 0.
Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected to network port 1 on board 0 on router AR-28.
In the rear panel of the router, you can view the board slots and enable DHCP function on network port
1.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/1]ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 //Set the IP
address of network port 0/1. The router also uses this IP address as the
gateway address and allocates it to the DHCP client.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/1]dhcp select interface //Select the DHCP
server mode based on interfaces. You can select the DHCP server based on
other modes.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/1]dhcp server dns-list 192.168.2.20 //Set the DNS
server IP address that will be delivered along with the gateway IP
address to the DHCP client. The DNS server IP address is optional.

[Quidway-Ethernet0/1]dhcp server option **** //Set the DHCP options as

required.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/1]dhcp server expired **** //Set the DHCP lease
period. You can set the lease period to unlimited or several days. The
maximum lease period is 365 days. The default lease period is 24 hours.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/1]quit //Return to the configuration mode.
[Quidway]quit //Exit the configuration mode.
<Quidway>save //Save the settings.
After the configuration, save the configured data. Otherwise, the data you configured will be
lost after system restart.
In the preceding scripts, *** indicates the parameters followed. These parameters can be set based on
your needs. For which parameters can be set, press Shift + ?.
8.3.4 Setting Option 246 Parameters

This topic describes how to set Option 246 parameters on the DHCP server.
Context
The DHCP server has been set up.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Administrative Tools > DHCP.
The DHCP window is displayed.
Step 2 Click to expand the navigation tree, as shown in Figure 8-25.
Figure 8-25 DHCP window

Step 3 Right-click IPV4 and choose Set Predefined Options.
The Predefined Options and Values dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-26.
Figure 8-26 Predefined Options and Values dialog box
Step 4 Click Add.
The Option Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-27 Option Type dialog box

Table 8-2 Option type parameters
Parameter Example
Name ip phone
Data type String
Code 246
Description ip phone auto provision
Step 6 Click OK.
The Predefined Options and Values dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Click OK.
The DHCP window is displayed.
Step 8 Right-click Scope Options and choose Configure Options.
The Scope Options dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-28.
Figure 8-28 Scope Options dialog box (1)

Step 9 Select option246, as shown in Figure 8-29.
Figure 8-29 Scope Options dialog box (2)
Step 10 Set String value to the URL for obtaining the UPF file.
l The value is in the format of upfprofile.address=https://server IP address/UPF file name, for

example, upfprofile.address=https://192.168.1.222/UPF-eSpace7950.xml. The value must not
contain spaces or Chinese characters.
l The character string in DHCP Option mode contains a maximum of 590 characters.
Step 11 Click OK.

The configuration is complete, and server configuration information is displayed in the
DHCP window.
----End
8.4 VFOneNet Provision Configuration Guide

Context
To implement batch IP phone management, you need to connect IP phones to the public ACS
server. After connecting to the public ACS server, IP phones automatically obtain number

information and complete SIP registration. Terminal users only need power on IP phones and
connect them to the network to complete login and registration. This implements IP phone
zero-configuration access.
Figure 8-30 shows the terminal management deployment service process.
This terminal management mechanism does not use Huawei NMS server. Therefore, you need to first
use Option 246 to deliver the Bootstrap NMS address, user name, and password to IP phones. Then, IP
phones can obtain the public ACS server address from the Bootstrap NMS. The access mode of "DHCP
+ two NMSs" is insecure and applies only to the specific customer. It is not recommended in other
scenarios.
Figure 8-30 Service process
1. The DHCP Option246 parameters (BootStrap ACS address, and user name and password
used to access the ACS) are set. For details, see Configuring Option 246.
2-4. After the IP Phone is power on, the BootStrap ACS address and the user name and
password used to access the ACS are obtained from the Option 246 character string value.

5. The IP phone proactively connects to the BootStrap ACS, and the user name and password
in Option 246 are used to perform authentication and report the IP Phone and AR information.
6-7. After device verification, the BootStrap ACS uses the SetParameterValues method to
deliver the URL, user name, and password of the Public ACS.
8. The IP Phone proactively connects to the Public ACS.
9. The Public ACS uses the Download method to deliver the root certificate to the IP Phone.
10. The IP Phone restarts.
11-12. The Public ACS uses the GetParameterValues method to obtain the certificate name
and uses the SetParameterValues method to enable the IP Phone certificate verification.
13. The Public ACS uses the SetParameterValues method to deliver the registration
information such as the SIP number and password of the IP Phone.
14. The IP Phone obtains the registration information and initiates SIP registration to the AS.
Table 8-4 describes the TR-069 parameters involved in the process.
Configuring Option 246

This section describes how to configure DHCP Option 246 to implement IP phone zero-
configuration access.
For details about how to configure DHCP Option 246, see 8.3.4 Setting Option 246
Parameters. In step 10, enter the parameters in String value and separate parameters with
the semicolon (;).
For example: acs.address=https://bootstrapacs.vodafone.co.uk:443/cwmpWeb/
CPEMgt;acsusr=Vodafone_Huawei;acspsw=548edds899waswe;env=11;sync=0
Table 8-3 Configurate on DHCP Server

No. Item Details Remarks
1 acs.address acs.address=https:// Bootstrap ACS URL

bootstrapacs.vodafone.co.uk:
443/cwmpWeb/CPEMgt;
2 acsusr acsusr=Vodafone_Huawei; Bootstrap ACS username
3 acspsw acspsw=548edds899waswe; Bootstrap ACS password
4 env env=11 This parameter means interworking

with VFOneNet solution.
5 sync sync=0 l 0: Modify the ACS

information(URI/username/
password) only at the first DHCP
periodic
l 1: modify the ACS information
every DHCP periodic
Default value: 0

Configuring TR-069
During IP Phone deployment and access, the BootStrap ACS and Public ACS use the
SetParameterValues method to deliver key parameters to the IP Phone, and the Public ACS
uses the GetParameterValues method to obtain the root certificate name of the IP Phone.
Table 8-4 describes the parameters.
Users can deliver other TR-069 parameters as required. For details, see the TR-069
Configuration Parameter Description and Configuration File Parameter Description.
Table 8-4 TR-069 parameter description

Field ACS Parameter Parameter Description
Type
URL Device.ManagementServer.URL string(127) URL of the Public ACS, in

https://Public ACS address:
8444/tr069/services/acs
format.
Example: https://
10.184.93.173:8444/tr069/
services/acs
Userna Device.ManagementServer.Userna string(255) Authentication user name of

me me the Public ACS.
Example: acsusername
Passwo Device.ManagementServer.Passw string(255) Authentication password of

rd ord the Public ACS.
Example: acsuser@123
enable Device.UserInterface.X_001E10_ boolean Indicates whether to enable

HttpsVerifyMode certificate verification.
The options are as follows:
l 0: disable
l 1: enable
Default value: 0
Example: 1
CertXN Device.UserInterface.X_001E10_ string(255) Root certificate name of the

ame Cert.X_001E10_CertXName IP Phone.
Read-only.
NOTE
In CertXName, X ranges from
1 to 10.
UserNa Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(255) User name used during IP

me eProfile.Line. Phone authentication.
1.SIP.AuthUserName Example: user

Field ACS Parameter Parameter Description

Type
Passwd Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(255) Password used during IP

eProfile.Line.1.SIP.AuthPassword Phone authentication.
Example: user@123
Accoun Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(255) IP Phone account ID used to

t eProfile.Line. register with the server.
1.SIP.X_001E10_Account Example: 80000
LabelN Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(63) Label name displayed on

ame eProfile.Line. the IP Phone for the
1.SIP.X_001E10_LabelName account.
Example: Jack
Primar Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(127) IP address of the active

yRegSe eProfile.Line. registrar server with which
rverAd 1.SIP.RegistrarServer the account is registered.
dress Example: 10.184.93.20
Primar Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic unsignedInt Port of the active registrar

yRegSe eProfile.Line. server with which the
rverPor 1.SIP.RegistrarServerPort account is registered.
t Value range: 0-65535
Default value: 5060
Example: 5060
CallOu Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic string(127) IP address of the active

tProxy eProfile.Line. proxy call server, which is
Server 1.SIP.OutboundProxy configured on the IP Phone
Addres side.
s Example: 10.184.93.56
NOTE
If there is no proxy server
onsite, do not set this
parameter.
CallOu Device.Services.VoiceService.Voic unsignedInt Port number of the active

tProxy eProfile.Line. proxy call server, which is
Server 1.SIP.OutboundProxyPort configured on the IP Phone
Port side.
Value range: 0-65535
Default value: 5060
Example: 5060
Verification
After being powered on, IP phones are registered successfully and display the home screen.

8.5 Setting Up an HTTP Server

This section describes how to set up the HTTP server using an Apache server or Windows IIS
server.
Context
The Apache server and the Windows IIS server cannot be used at the same time.
If you want to use the Apache server, stop and disable the Windows IIS server first. Use either
of the following two methods:
l Method 1: Choose Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
l Method 2: Right-click and choose Open Apache Monitor from the shortcut menu.
In the Apache Service Monitor window that is displayed, select Services.
8.5.1 Using the Apache Server

This section describes how to set up an Apache server in the Windows XP operating system.
Context
You can obtain the Apache server installation software from http://httpd.apache.org and
install the Apache server in default configuration using the installation wizard. The following
example uses Apache HTTP Server2.2 running in the Windows XP operating system.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Apache HTTP Server 2.2 > Monitor Apache Servers.
l If is displayed in the system tray, the Apache server is stopped. Go to Step 2.
l If is displayed in the system tray, the Apache server is running. Skip step 2 and go to
step 3.
After you install the Apache server, restart the system for the Apache service to take effect.
Step 2 Start the Apache server. You can start the Apache server in either of the following ways:
l Click and choose Start.
l Right-click , choose Open Apache Monitor. In the Apache Service Monitor window
that is displayed, click Start.
Step 3 Copy files that IP phones will access to the root folder of the Apache server, for example, C:
\Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Apache2.2\htdocs.
l If you place the files directly in the htdocs folder, type the address in the format of
http://IP address of the PC where the Apache server is installed, for example, http://
192.168.1.51, to access the Apache server.

l If you place the files in a sub-folder of the htdocs folder, type the address in the format
of http://IP address of the PC where the Apache server is installed/sub-folder name, for
example, http://192.168.1.51/filename, to access the Apache server.
----End
8.5.2 Using the Windows IIS Component

This section describes how to set up an HTTP server using the Windows IIS component.
Context
The Windows IIS component can be used to configure the HTTP server. Before the
configuration, obtain the Windows operating system installation CD-ROM or the installation
package URL and then install the Windows IIS component.
To install the Windows IIS component in the Windows XP operating system, perform the
following steps:
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel. The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.

The Add or Remove Programs window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-31.
Figure 8-31 Add or Remove Programs window
Step 3 Click Add/Remove Windows Components in the left pane.

The Windows Components Wizard window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-32.
Figure 8-32 Windows Components Wizard window
Step 4 Select Internet Information Services (IIS) in the Components area and click Next. The
system displays a window asking you to insert the installation CD-ROM before the
installation is started.
Step 5 Insert the installation CD-ROM, and click OK. The Files Needed dialog box is displayed, as
Figure 8-33 Files Needed dialog box
Step 6 Click Browse and set Copy files from to G:\i386.

Step 7 Click OK. The system starts copying the files and installing the component, as shown in
Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34 Configuring Components dialog box
After the installation is complete, the dialog box automatically exits. You can check for the
IIS component in Control Panel.
Step 8 After the installation is complete, store the IP phone version and configuration files in the root
directory C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\.
----End
8.6 Setting Up the AD and DNS Servers

This section describes how to set up the Active Directory (AD) and DNS servers provided by
the Windows Server 2008 operating system.
Prerequisites
l The AD and DNS server components have been installed in the Windows Server 2008
operating system.
l The IP address of the Windows Server 2008 operating system is a static IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Run, enter dcpromo, and click OK.

The Active Directory Domain and Active Directory Domain Services Installation Wizard
windows are displayed successively, as shown in Figure 8-35 and Figure 8-36.
Figure 8-35 Active Directory Domain window
Figure 8-36 Active Directory Domain Services Installation Wizard window
Step 2 Click Next.
The Choose a Deployment Configuration window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-37.

Figure 8-37 Choose a Deployment Configuration window
Step 3 Select Create a new domain in a new forest and click Next.
The Name the Forest Root Domain window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-38.

Figure 8-38 Name the Forest Root Domain window
Step 4 Enter a domain name, for example, uc.com, and click Next.
The Set Forest Functional Level window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-39.

Figure 8-39 Set Forest Functional Level window
Step 5 Set Forest functional level to Windows Server 2008 R2 and click Next.
The Additional Domain Controller Options window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-40.

Figure 8-40 Additional Domain Controller Options window
Step 6 Select DNS Server and click Next.

The Location for Database, log Files, and SYSVOL window is displayed, as shown in
Figure 8-41.

Figure 8-41 Location for Database, Log Files, and SYSVOL window
Step 7 Use the default settings and click Next.

The Directory Services Restore Mode Administrator Password window is displayed, as

Figure 8-42 Directory Services Restore Mode Administrator Password window
Step 8 Set Password and Confirm password, and click Next.

The Installation window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-43.

Figure 8-43 Installation window
Step 9 When the installation is complete, click Finish.

----End
Result
When the DNS server is installed, choose Start > Administrative Tools > DNS to view the
new zone uc.com, as shown in Figure 8-44.
Figure 8-44 DNS Manager window

Click the new zone to view the detailed resource records of the new zone. Each zone has two
records: Start of Authority (SOA) and Name Server (NS). The SOA determines the account in
use, while the NS determines the server.
When the DNS server is configured, create Type A records in the new zone.
A Type A record provides the mapping between a standard host name and an IP address. The
Name parameter indicates the host name and the Value parameter indicates the mapped IP
address. For example, {relay1.bar.foo.com, 10.37.93.126, A} is a Type A record. The
procedure for creating a Type A record is as follows:
1. Right-click uc.com, choose New host, set the server name and IP address, and click Add
Host, as shown in Figure 8-45.
Figure 8-45 New host window
2. Repeat the preceding step to add more Type A records to set server IP address in the new
DNS zone.
8.7 Editing the Microsoft AD2008 User

Prerequisites
The AD server has been installed. For details, see 8.6 Setting Up the AD and DNS Servers.
Data Plan
The following table lists the user information under the assumption that a domain user under
the organizational unit Department needs to be added.

Parameter Setting
Full name Bruce
User logon name Bruce
Password Bruce123//
Department test
Job title manager
Telephone number 12345
Home 11111111
Mobile 13711111111
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Active Directory Users and Computers.
The Active Directory Users and Computers window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-46.
Figure 8-46 Active Directory Users and Computers window
Step 2 Right-click Department, and choose New > User from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 8-47.

Figure 8-47 Creating a user
Step 3 Set the Full name, and User logon name parameters, as shown in Figure 8-48.

Figure 8-48 New Object - User dialog box (1)
l Full name is the user name displayed on the phone screen. You can right-click the user and choose
Rename from the shortcut menu to change the value of Full name.
l Full name set here is automatically synchronized to Display name of the user properties. The value
of Display name is the value of User Name required in LDAP parameter settings.
Step 4 Click Next. In the dialog box that is displayed, set Password and Confirm password, and
select User must change password at next logon, as shown in Figure 8-49.

Figure 8-49 New Object - User dialog box (2)
Step 5 Click Next, and click Finish in the displayed dialog box.
Step 6 Double-click Bruce.

The Bruce Properties page is displayed.
Step 7 Click the General tab. Set Telephone number.
Step 8 Click the Telephones tab. Set Home and Mobile.
Step 9 Click the Organization tab. Set Department and Job Title.
----End

Espace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone V200R003C30 Administrator Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Espace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone V200R003C30 Administrator Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Espace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone V200R003C30 Administrator Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

eSpace 7910 and 7950 IP Phone

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Calls attention to important information, best practices

USM is renamed CloudUSM for the EC6.X networking.

Updated the content about Table2 Parameter description.

Updated the content about 6.4.1 Network and 6.4.12 Others.

Updated the content about 6.4.1 Network.

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Updated the content about 5.6 Multi-Certificate Support.

Updated the content about 6.4.12 Others.

Updated the content about 6.4.6 SIP Signaling.

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

3 Preparing for Your Configuration..............................................................................................8

4 Selecting a Configuration Method...........................................................................................23

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

4.2.2 Creating an IP Phone Management Domain............................................................................................................. 52

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

6.4.1 Network................................................................................................................................................................... 172

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

8.7 Editing the Microsoft AD2008 User.......................................................................................................................... 350

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

1 Before You Start

Table 1-1 Manual usage guide

Deployment Setting up the network 3.3 Network Environment

Installing the IP phone and eSpace 7910/eSpace

Learning about the 2 Before Your

Selecting a proper 4 Selecting a

Using all the phone eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

Scenario Task Chapter/Section for

Routine maintenance Upgrading eSpace 7910/ 7.2 Upgrade

Delivering the configuration 7.3 Configuration File

Quickly configuring a single 7.1 Quick Configuration

Configuring services 5 Service Configuration

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

2 Before Your Configuration

2.1 EC6.X Networking

Figure 2-1 EC6.X networking

2.2 UC2.X Networking

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

Figure 2-2 UC2.X networking

2.3 IMS+UC Networking

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

Figure 2-3 IMS+UC networking

2.4 IMS Networking

Figure 2-4 shows the IMS network of eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950.

Issue 17 (2019-11-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

Figure 2-4 IMS networking

2.5 Third-Party SIP Server Networking